Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (179 trang)

Giao an Anh 8 The newest

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (920.16 KB, 179 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b> Period: 1</b>

<b>st</b>

<b><sub> August 15</sub></b>

<b>th</b>

<b><sub> ,2013</sub></b>



<i><b> Revision </b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>



<b>I.</b>



<b> </b>

<b> Objectives</b>

<b> : By the end of this lesson,ss.wil be able to:</b>


+ Review all basic knowledges presented in English 7 .


+ Know the structure of English 8.



<b>II- Language focus</b>

: + The past simple tense.



+ Simple future tense, present progressive.


+ Comparatives and superlatives…



<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


- Book, chalk…



<b>IV. Teaching procedures:</b>



<i><b>Teacher’s & Ss’activities</b></i>

<i><b>Content</b></i>



<i><b>I. Organization(1'):</b></i>



<b>- Asks some free questions:</b>


<i><b> II. Checking the old lesson.(1’) </b></i>


<i><b>III. New lesson:</b></i>



<i><b>Activity 1</b></i>




- Guides the students review practicing


pronunciation.



<b>*Review 3 tenses</b>



- Get ss to give out adv of tense


- Get ss to give out verbs .


- Get ss to give out example.


- Ss give out the negative form



- Ss change 2 sentences into negative.


- Ss give out the interrogative form.


_Ss change 2sentences into interrogative.



- Ss give out adverbs.



- Ss give out the form of verbs.


- Ss give out example.



. How are you?



. What’s the weather like to day?


…..



<b>- Review E. 7</b>


* Review some pronouce:



1-The way to read”oo”



"oo" is pronounced to "u ” or " u: "in the



following:



- book, cook, look, good, smooth,


The way to read ”ed”



"ed" is pronounced to "id” standing after t, d


<b>*Review 3 tenses</b>



1, The present progressive tense


adv: now, at the moment



Verbs: am/ is/ are + Ving



a, Mai and Hoa (skip) rope now.


b, I (teach) English at the moment.


- Add “not” behind am/ is/ are.


Ex: Mai and Hoa are not skipping.



I am not teaching English at the moment.


- Change is/ am/ are in front of S



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

- Ss give out the form of negative


- Ss change 2 sentences



- Interrogative



- Change 2 sentences



-Review the past simple tense:


- Assks ss to give out adverbs




- Ss give out the form of verbs



-

- Ss give out example



- Ss give out negative form,then


change 3 sentences into negative,



- Interrogative.



Review modal verbs:



- How many modal verbs have you


learnt?



- What are they?


- How to use?


- Negative?


- Interrogative?



-Retell how to use comparatives and


superlatives.



<i> </i>

<i><b>Activity 2:- Introduce E.8</b></i>


- Get Ps to look at their textbook and get


knowledge about it



<i><b>III. Feedback(1')</b></i>



-Retell the main contents of this lesson.




<b>Verb: am/ is/ are going to + V</b>


will + V


+ Nga (watch) T.V tonight.


+ They (go) to school tomorrow.


- Add “not” behind Be or Will


- Change Be or Will in front of S


3, The past simple tense



adv: last, yesterday, ago



Verbs: Be – was/ were Can – Could


Vinfinitive – Ved/ V2



- I (be) on a farm last sunday.


- She (drink) milk yesterday


- Nam (play) soccer two day ago.


(-) Be/ can: Add “not” behind was/were


Vin : Add “didn’t” in front of



(?) Be/can: change were/was/could in front of S


Ordin: Add “did” in front of S + V



4, Modal verbs



*form : Modal + V


(- ) Add "not" behind modal


(?) Change modal infront of S


5, Comparatives.




Adj - Comparatives - Superlatives


Good better the best



Small smaller the smallest


Beautiful more beautiful most beautiful


* The use of adj/adv.



* Put the verb in correct form



1,My mother (go) to work yesterday.


2,Students (play) games now.



3,Nga (do) her home work tonight.


4, She (wash) her clother last night.


<b>- Introduce E.8</b>



*Getting started *Listen and read*Speak *Listen


*Read *Write *Language focus.



<i><b>IV. Home work(1')</b></i>

<i><b> : </b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>


- Review all the grammars



- Prepare unit 1: - Getting started - Listen and read.



<i><b> Period: 1</b></i>

<i><b>st</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Date: August 17</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> ,2013</sub></b></i>



<b>UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<b>I.</b>




<b> </b>

<b> Objectives:</b>

<b> By the end of the lesson SS will be able to :</b>


Introduce people and respond to introduction



<b>II. Language contents:</b>



What do/ does + S + look like ?


_ Enough : Adj + enough



<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>



Books, cassette , pictures


<b>IV. Procedures:</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A.

<b> Warm up</b>

<b> :</b>



T: Ask ss some questions



_ What did you do during last summer?


_ Did you have any new friends ?



_ What do you do in your free time ? Sts:


Listen and try to answer



<b>B. Present the new lesson:</b>


<b>Activity 1:</b>



T: ask ss to look at the pictures and


describe.




Ss: do as requested.



T: control and correct mistakes



<b>Activity 2:</b>



T: Present the dialogue by asking some


questions:



_ Do you remember Hoa?


_ Where does she come from?



Then introduce the dialogue and play the


tape.



Ss: Listen and try to answer



T: Present some structures and give some


examples.



Ss: listen carefully and copy down.



T: Ask ss to practice reading and answering


in pairs.



I. Getting started:



a , playing soccer


b , read books



c , play chess



d , playing volleyball


II. Listen and read :



1, Structures:



_ S +do/does +look like ?


Ex: What does she look like ?


_ She is beautiful and smart.


_ S + tobe (not) + enough + to –V



Ex:



_ She is not old enough to go to school.


_ He is strong enough to lift that table.



2, Answer:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

Ss: Do as requested.



T: Correct mistakes each pair of sis.



<b>C. Conclusion</b>

<b> .</b>

<b> </b>



T: Remark all period and give some


exercises.



Ss: Listen and practice




<b>D. Homework</b>

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



_ Ask ss to learn structures by heart.


_ Do exercises



_ Prepare next period.



c, She wasn’t old enough tobe in my class.


d, Nien is going to visit Hoa at Christmas.



* Exercises:



1 Nam is tall. He can play volleyball.


2. My sister is old. She can go to school.



<i><b> </b></i>



<i><b> Period: 3</b></i>

<i><b>nd</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Date : August 20</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> ,2013</sub></b></i>



<b>UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS</b>



<b> Lesson 2 : SPEAK and LANGUAGE FOCUS 3,4</b>


<b>I .Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to :</b>



- Speak and describe someone.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ The usage of Adj in a sentence




_ Vocabulary: slim, straight, curly, bold, dark, blond, fair….


<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>



_ Books and pictures


<b>IV. Procedures:</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up: Brainstorm



T: Ask ss to rewrite some adjective they’ve


learned



Ss: Remind and try to write Adj


T: Look and correct.



B:

<b> Present the new lesson</b>

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>


<i><b>Activity 1:</b></i>



<i>1. Pre- speaking:</i>



T: supply ss some more adjectives then


practice them.



Ss: Do as the request



T: Set situation ( Hoa is telling about Mary ).


And read the dialogue aloud.



Ss: Listen carefully




T: Write on the board the dialogue and


explain the way to use Adj in a sentence.


Then practice in pairs



<i>2. While speaking:</i>



Ss: Listen and practice



T: Remind sts to the modal sentences used to


describe someone and guide ss to base on the


dialogue in order to describe the 6 pictures.


Then practice in pairs



Ss: Listen and do as requested



T: Control class and correct mistakes.



<i>3. Post speaking:</i>



T: ask ss to describe their friends


Ss: work in groups



T: ask some groups to present before the


class



Unit 1 : Speak



New words:




_ slim : ( real )


_ straight : ( real )


_ curly : ( real )



_ bold : ( picture + translate )


_ blond : ( picture + translate )


1. Read the dialogue:



*Hoa: This person is short and thin.


She has long blond hair.



Lan : Is this Mary ?


Hoa : Yes



2. Now take turns to make similar


dialogues……



A. This person is tall and thin .


He has short black hair.



B. Is this Van?


A. Yes



….



3. Look and describe:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

<i><b>Language focus 3,4</b></i>


SS answer the questions


Describe people in the picture



T give SS some clues



T: Ask ss to complete the paragraph and the


dialogue in pairs.



Ss: Complete and practice in pairs before


class.



T: Listen and correct again.



T: Give sis some sentences using “ enough”


then write on the board structure again.


Ss: Look and try to do.



T: Ask sis to practice exercises


Ss: try to do them



<i>a, How many people are therre in the </i>


<i>picture</i>



<i>b, What does each person look lik?</i>


<i>c, What is each person wearing?,</i>



4. Complete the dialogue:



Hung is strong . He can lift the table.


Ss: Hung is strong enough to lift the table.


_ S + be (not) + Adj + enough + To – V


a, not big enough




b, not old enough


c, strong enough


d, good enough


Exercises:



1. The text is easy . We can do it in thirty


minutes



2. Nam is tall . He can play volleyball well.


3. I’m not rich . I can’t buy a new bike.



<i><b> </b></i>



<i><b> Period:4</b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Date : August</sub></b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b><sub>22</sub></b></i>

<i><b>nd</b></i>

<i><b><sub> ,2013</sub></b></i>



<b>UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS</b>



<i><b> Lesson 3: LISTEN AND LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2</b></i>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>



- Listen to the dialoguage then put the suitable sentence in the gap :


- Review ss’ knowledge that they’ve learnt.



<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar :



- Simple tenses



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

_ Book, color chalk , and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>




<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up: Slap the board..



T: Write some the describing Adj &


characters on the board and guide sis to


play.



Ss: Do as requested.



B. New lesson:


1.



<i>Pre-listening</i>



T: supply ss some more modals



sentences then practice them. ( prepare on


the sub-board )



_ Set situation and ask ss to listen once.


Ss: Do as requested and listen carefully



2.



<i>While- listening</i>

:



T: Have ss listen 3 times again and


complete the conversations. Then write



on the board.



Ss: Listen and fill in the blank


T: Control whole class.



3.



<i>Post-listening</i>

:



T: Play the tape again and check the


correct sentences ( sentence by sentence )


_ Then hang on the sub-board



Ss: Listen carefully and look then check


again.



<b>-</b>

Slim


<b>-</b>

blond


<b>-</b>

straight


<b>-</b>

long


<b>-</b>

bald


….



Listen



- How do you do ?



- It’s pleasure to meet you ?


- I’d like to meet you.




- come and meet.



a, Hoa: Hello Nam.


Nam: Morning Hoa.



Hoa :Nam,(1) …………my cousin, Thu


Nam: (2)………..., Thu.


Thu : Nice to meet you too, Nam.



b, Khai: Miss Lien, (3)………...


my mother.



Miss Lien: (4)……….Miss Vi.


Mrs Vi :The pleasure is all mine, Miss Lien.


Miss Lien: Oh, There is the principal. Please


excuse me. Mrs Vi, but I must talk to him.


………



Keys



1, I’d like to meet you


2, Nice to meet you


3, I’d like you to meet



4, It’s a pleasure to meet you,


5, come and meet



6, How do you do?


<b>Language focus:</b>




1. Look and describe:


a, There are four people.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

T: Remind sis the way to use the simple


tense.



_ write structure on the board.


_ Take notes



Ss: Listen and copy down



C. Conclusion

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Remark all period and read new words


again.



Ss: Listen carefully.


D. Homework

<b> .</b>

<b> </b>



T: Ask ss to learn new words by heart and


describe some people in ss’ family.



Ss: Listen and copy down.



T: From warming up teacher shows the


picture, ask sis to look at and do it basing


on the questions.



Ss: Listen and do as requested then


practice in pairs before class.




T: Listen and then correct their mistakes



thin woman with short hair; there is a boy


sitting on the ground and there is a short man


standing across the street.



c, The man standing next to the taxi is


wearing a yellow shirt and black trousers ;


The woman is wearing a green skirt and red


blouse. The boy sitting on the ground is


wearing blue short and a while shirt ; The


man across the street is wearing blue trousers


and a pink shirt.



2.

<i>Complete the paragraph</i>

. …


_

S + V (es/s)



a, lives_ sent_ was_ is



b, is_ are _ came _ showed _ introduced.



<i><b> Period: 5</b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Date : August 25</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> ,2013</sub></b></i>



<b>UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS</b>


<b> Lesson 4 : READ</b>



<b>I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson SS will be able to: </b>


- Practice reading comprehension skill.




- Answer the questions about characters, hobbies of Ba’s friends.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : Simple present tense



_Vocabulary: character, sociable, generous, volunteer,



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>



_ Book , cassette, and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures:</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>


A. Warm up: Chatting



T: Ask sis some questions about their


friends.



Ss : Listen and try to answer.



B:

<b> New lesson</b>

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>


1.



<i>Pre-reading:</i>



T: From warming up teacher set


situation about Ba’s friends.


_ Give some guiding questions.


Ss: Look and listen carefully.


T: Read and give out some new



words and then practice them.



Ss: Listen , copy down ands practice


in chorus, independent.



2.

<i>While-reading</i>

:

<i> </i>



T: Give sis call 10 minutes to read


the paragraph in silent



_ Call some sis to read aloud before


class.



_Ask sis to choose the best answer in


pairs.



Ss: Listen and do as requested.



3.



<i>Post-reading</i>

:



T: Ask sis to read paragraph fast and


answer the guiding questions first


then answer the questions.



_call some sis to practice.


Ss : listen and try to do in pair.


T: control and hang the answer on


the board ( sub-board )




Ss : Look and correct mistakes.



C. Conclusion:



<i><b>Contents</b></i>


Unit 1 : Lesson 5.



1, Do you have a lot of friends?


2, Are they the same age to you?


3, Do they have the same characters?



Read:



1, How many friends does Ba have?


2, Do they have the same characters?


3, Who is the most sociable?



a, New words:



- character : ( translation )


- sociable : ( translation )


- generous : ( translation )


- volunteer : ( situation )


- orphanage: ( translation)


- reserved : ( translation )


- outgoing : ( translation)



- sense of humor : ( situation & example )


- annoy : ( translation )




b, Choose the best answer:


a, A . three



b, C . does not effect his school work


c, B . don’t talk much



d, D . get tired of



c, Answer the questions:



a, Ba feels lucky having a lot of friends.


b, Bao is the most sociable.



c, Khai likes reading.



d, A bad thing about Ba’s jokes is sometimes his


jokes annoy his friends.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

T: Remark all period and ask sis to


answer the last question.



Ss: Listen and try to answer



D. Homework

<b> .</b>

<b> </b>



T: Ask sis to learn new words by


heart .



_ Read and answer the questions at



home again,



_ Do exercises at home and prepare


next period.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

<i><b> Period: 6</b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Date : August 29</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> ,2013 </sub></b></i>



<b>UNIT 1: MY FRIENDS</b>


<b> Lesson 5: WRITE</b>



<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>


- Answer the questions in the writing part



- Write some sentences describing themselves & their close friends.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - Simple present tense.


_ Vocabulary:- appearance, humorous


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Book, color chalk , and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up:



T: Ask ss to remind some Adj and write


down




Ss. Try to write.



B. New lesson:


1.

<i>Pre-writing</i>

:



T: Set situation and introduce the section .


Ss: Listen carefully.



T: Read the information about Tam and


hang on the board.( sub-board)



- Give sis some new words and practice.


Ss :Listen, copy down and practice reading.



2.

<i>While-writing</i>

:

<i> </i>



T: First guide sis to fill a similar form for


your partner, using the questions as


prompts to describe .



- Then ask sis to practice in pairs before


class.



Ss: Listen and do as requested.


T: Listen and correct mistakes.



3.

<i>Post-writing</i>



<b>Write:</b>




1.Read the information about Tam:


New words:



+ appearance : ( translate )


+ humorous :( explain)



_ Name :Le Van Tam Age: 14


_ Appearance: tall, thin, short black hair.


_ Characters : sociable, humorous,


helpful.



_ Address : 26 Tran Phu street ,


Hanoi.



_ Family : mother, father, elder


brother and


hung.



_ Friends : Ba and Bao



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

T: Have sis write a paragraph to base on the


prompts. Then call 2 sis to write on the


board.



Ss: Try to write



T: Look and correct mistakes.



D. Consolidation

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>




T: Remark all period Ask sis to write open


paragraph about their close friends.



Ss: Listen and try to write.



C. Homework

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Learn vocabulary by heart.



_ Write a paragraph about your close


friends.



Ss: Listen carefully.



_ Name:


_ Appearance:


_Characters:


_ Address:


_ Family:


_ Friends:



3. Now write a paragraph about your


partner.



His/ her name’s…



<i><b> Period: 7</b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Monday August 29</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub>, 2011 </sub></b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<b> Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read.</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>




- Talk about the intends ( actions in the future )


<b>-</b>

Make arrangements



<b>-</b>

Write again the notes in telephone.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - Simple future tense.



_ Vocabulary:- wait a minute, down stair , hold on.


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Book, color chalk , and sub-board, some real things.


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up: Chatting



T: Ask ss some questions about telephone


Ss: Listen and try to answer.



T: Correct mistakes again.



B. New lesson



T: From chatting teacher ask ss to look at


the pictures and match each object its name.


Ss: Try to match in group then one ss write


on the board.




T: Look and check ( use sub- board )



1.

<i>Presentation</i>

<i><b>:</b></i>

<i> </i>



T: Set situation , read the dialogue and give


out some new words.



Ss: Look listen and copy down.



T: Read the dialogue again then ask ss to


practice reading in pairs.



Ss: Listen carefully and read aloud.



2.

<i>Practice</i>

:



T: Ask ss to read the dialogue again and


answer with “ who”



- practice asking and answering in pairs


before class.



Ss: Listen and work in pairs.



1. Do you have a telephone directory?


2. Do you often talk on the phone?


3. Do you have an address book ?



1.

<i>Getting stared:</i>




a, an answering machine


b, a fax machine



c, a mobile phone


d, a telephone directory


e, a public telephone


f, an address book



2.

<i>Listen and read</i>

:


* New words:



- wait a minute: ( translate )



- down stair : ( translate & example )


- hold on : ( translate& example )



* Answer with “ who ”


a, Nga made the call


b, Nga introduced herself.



c, Nga invited Hoa to the movies.


d, Nga arranged a meeting place.


e, Hoa arranged the time.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

T: Listen and correct mistakes.



C. Consolidation

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Remark and ask ss to make a similar



dialogue.



Ss: Listen and try to do


T: control.



D. Homework:



T: Ask ss to learn new words by heart and


make an open dialogue.



Ss: Listen carefully.



_ go to see a play


_ go to the concert



<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>



<i><b> Period: 8</b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Wednesday August 31</sub></b></i>

<i><b>st</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011 </sub></b></i>



<b>Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS</b>



<b> Lesson 2: SPEAK and LANGUAGE FOCUS 3</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>



- Practice & develop speaking skill about making arrangements on the telephone


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - Review structure: Would you like to…?


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>




_ color chalk , and sub-board ,Cassette player


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Check up some ss about open dialogues in


last period.



Ss: go to the board and practice in pairs.



B. New lesson

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>


1.

<i>Pre - speaking</i>

:



T: Set situations and guide ss to arrange these


sentences into the right dialogue.



_ First read across



1.

<i>Put the sentences blow in the correct </i>


<i>order to make a complete conversation:</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

_ Arrange right sentences


_ Write number on the board.


Ss: Listen and do as requested.



T: Look and , correct again (use sub-board).


Then ask ss to practice speaking in pairs



aloud before class



Ss: Listen and practice.



T: Control and correct pronunciations.



2.

<i>While - speaking</i>

:



T : Guide ss to base on part 1 and make


similar dialogue about Ba and Bao are


making arrangements to play chess.



S: Listen and try to complete the dialogue in


pairs first.



T: Call some ss to write Bao’s sentences on


the board.



Ss: Write on the board



T: Correct mistakes again and ask ss practice


in pairs before class



Ss: Listen and practice.



<i>3. Post - speaking</i>



Language focus 3



T: Set situation , explain the requested and



ask ss to do.



- Have ss to write on the board.



Ss: Control whole class and correct mistakes.


- Ask ss to read aloud again.



C. Consolidation:



T: Remark all the lesson and ask ss to make


the similar arrangements.



Ss: Try to make new dialogues in part A.


T: Listen ,control and correct mistakes.



D.

<b> Homework</b>

<b> :</b>



T: Ask ss to learn the way to make an


arrangement.



_ Make similar arrangements at home.


_ Do exercises.



6-c



2.

<i>Complete the dialogue .Ba and Bao are </i>


<i>making arrangements to play. Practice the</i>


<i>dialogue with a partner .Then make the </i>


<i>similar arrangements.</i>




Ba: Hello. 8 257 012



Bao: May I speak to Ba, please ? This is


<b>Bao.</b>



Ba : Hello Bao . How are you?


Bao: I’m fine , thanks. And you?


Ba : Great. Me too.



Bao: Can you play chess tonight?



Ba : I’m sorry. I can’t play chess tonight.


I’m going to do my homework .



Bao: What about tomorrow afternoon ?



Ba : Yes. Tomorrow afternoon is fine.


Bao: I’ll meet you at the Central Chess


<b>Club.</b>



Ba : At the Central Chess Club? Ok. Let


‘s meet the front door.



Bao: Is 2.00 o’clock Ok?



Ba : Great. See you tomorrow afternoon


at 2.00 o’clock.



* _ go to the concert


_ go shopping



_ go fishing



3.



<i>Complete the speech bubbles. Use each</i>


<i>adverb in the box once</i>

.

<i> </i>



Keys:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

<b> Period: 9</b>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Thursday September 1</sub></b></i>

<i><b>st</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011 </sub></b></i>



<b>Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS</b>


<b> Lesson 3: LISTEN & LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>



- Listen to the telephone conversation,then fill in the missing information


- Review knowledge they’ve learnt



- Use structures to do exercises.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar :



- Talk about intentions with “ be going to ”


- Adverb of place.



<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Color chalk , and sub-board. Cassette and tape


<b>V. Procedures :</b>




<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up: Chatting



T & ss say about “ be going to”.



B. New lesson:


1.

<i>Pre-listening</i>

:



T: Set situation and introduce the


people in the dialogue. Then explain


the request of lesson.



Ss: Listen carefully.


T: Play cassette once.



2.

<i>While-listening</i>

:



T: Play the tape 3 times , give the


modal sentences and ask ss to fill in


the missing information they’ve heard.


Ss: Listen and try to fill.



T: Ask some ss to write on the board .



3.

<i>Post- listening</i>

:



T: Play the tape again and check ss’


filling the information .




T: We have a lot of homework today.


Ss: We are going to do our homework.


T: Lan has a play ticket.



Ss: Lan is going to see a play.



Listen.



Listen to the telephone conversation. Fill in the


missing information:



Transcription:



Secretary: Kingston Junior High School. Good


afternoon.



Woman: Good afternoon. Could I speak to the


principal, please



Secretary: I’m afraid Mr. Kelvin out at the


moment. Would you like to leave a massage?


Woman: Uhm, no. But I’d like to make an


appointment to see him.



Secretary: I think he will available on Tuesday.


Woman: Tuesday’s Ok. Can I see him in the


morning?



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

Ss: Listen and check mistakes again.



T: hang on the keys ( sub-board ).



Keys:



Date………..


Time………


For: The principal.



Message: Mrs. Mary Nguyen wanted to


see you at 9.45 in the morning.



Tel .number: 64683720942.



<i>4. Language focus 1, 2:</i>



T: From warming up teacher sets


situation and ask ss to re speak the


usage of “ be going to” Then guide ss


to do these exercises.



Ss: Listen carefully and practice in


group, Then write on the board.


T: Control and correct mistakes.



<i>Language focus 2</i>

.



T: Explain the way to do exercises and


hang on the sub-board on the board.


- Ask ss to practice in pairs and speak


aloud before class.




Ss: Listen and try to do



C. Consolidation:



T: Remark all period and give some


exercises



Ss: Listen and try to do.


D. Homework

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Ask ss to learn structure by heart


and do exercises.



Woman: Is 10.30 .Ok



Secretary: I’m sorry. The principal will have a


school visit at 10.30.What about 9.45?



Woman: 9.45 ? Let me see. Yes, it’s alright.


Secretary: What your name, please?



Woman : My name is Mary Nguyen.


Secretary: Is that N-G-Y-U-Y-E-N.?


Woman: Yes, that’s right .Mrs. Nguyen.


Secretary: And your address, please?



Woman: Number 23,51

st

<sub> Street. My telephone </sub>


number is 64683720942.




Secretary: Thank you, Mrs. Nguyen.


Woman: Thank you very much. Goodbye.


Secretary: Goodbye.



1.

<i>Work with a partner. Say what the people are </i>


<i>going to do. Follow the example sentence.</i>



* S + Tobe + going to + V


Ex: Nga has a movie ticket.


_ Nga is going to see a movie.


Practice :



a, Nam and Quang are going to fish.


b, She is going to read the new novel.


c, Van is going to do her homework.



d, He is going to watch an action movie on T.V


tonight.



e, She is going to give him a birthday present.



<i>2a. Copy the questionnaire in your exercise </i>


<i>book. Add three more activities to the list. Then </i>


<i>complete the ‘you’ column with checks and </i>


<i>crosses</i>

.

<i> </i>



What are they going to do on the


weekend?



Are you going



to….?



You Your partner



see a movie?


play sports?



meet your friends?


help your parents?


do your homework?


watch T.V?



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<i>going to do. Complete the ‘ your partner’ </i>


<i>column of the questionnaire.</i>



<i><b> </b></i>



<i><b> Period: 10 </b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Monday September 5th , 2011</sub></b></i>



<b>Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS</b>


<b> Lesson 4 : READ</b>



<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>



- Develop reading comprehension skill about biography of telephone.


- Know the inventor Alexander Graham Bell.



<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - Simple past tense.




_ Vocabulary:- emigrate, deaf-mute, experiment, transmit, lead to, assistant,


conduct,



countless, demonstrate, device, exhibition, message, commercial.


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Color chalk , and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up: Chatting


T & Ss talk about telephone



B. New lesson:


1.

<i>Pre-reading:</i>



T: Set situation and read aloud.



- Give out some new words and practice


in chorus, independent.



Ss: Listen carefully and practice.



2.

<i>While-reading:</i>



T: read the text again and ask ss to read


in silent .




Do you often use to talk with another?



What do you think about telephone? Is it useful?


Who invented it?



<b>Read:</b>



1. New words:



- emigrate: ( situation& example)


- deaf-mute: ( translate )



- experiment: ( translate )



- transmit : ( situation & example )


- lead to : ( translate )



- assistant: : ( situation & example)


- conduct: ( translate)



- demonstrate: ( translate )


- exhibition: ( translate )


- message : ( translate )


- commercial: ( translate )



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

- Choose “ true or false sentences”


- Read aloud before class.



Ss: Listen and do as requested .




3.

<i>Post- reading</i>

:

<i> </i>



T: Correct the true or false sentences .


- Have ss read the text aloud first ,then


put the events in the correct order.


- Ask ss to do in group



- write on the board.


Ss: Try to do.



T. Control, correct and give the keys


( sub-board )



C. Consolidation

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Ask ss some comprehension questions


about the text.



Ss: Try to answer.



T: Correct mistakes again.



D. Homework.



T: Ask ss to learn new words by heart.


- Read and translate the text at home.


- Do exercises.



b, F e, F


c, T f, T




3. Put the events in the correct order:


Alexander Graham Bell……….


1d, was born in Scotland.



2e, went to live in Canada.



3a, went to live in the United States.



4g, worked with people who could neither speak


or hear.



5c, worked with Thomas Watson.



6b, successfully demonstrated his invention.


7f , invented the telephone.



1, Who is Alexander Graham Bell?


2, When did he invent telephone?


3, Who helped him ?



4, When was the 1

st

<sub> telephone used in </sub>


commercial?



<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>



<i><b> Period: 11 </b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Wednesday September 7</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>



<b>Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS</b>



<b> Lesson 5: WRITE</b>



<b>I. Objectives : By th e end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>


- Develop writing skill



- Know about writing the telephone massage


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - Simple past tense, present tense.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Color chalk , and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up

<b> :</b>

<b> chatting</b>



T & Ss talk about the telephone.



B. New lesson:



1.

<i>Pre-writing:</i>



T: Set situation and read the


information in the telephone


message .



- Help ss to give some new words’



meaning



- Practice them in chorus,


independent.



- Then complete the message, base


on the telephone message and write


on the board.



Ss: Listen , copy down and practice.


T: Look and correct mistakes.



2.

<i>While-listening</i>

:



T: Have ss read the passage


carefully and write the telephone


message.



Ss: listen and try to write on the


board.



T: Correct and give the keys


(sub-board )



3.

<i>Post- writing</i>

:



T: Ask ss to read part 1& part 2


again and write a message for



Who invented the telephone?



Where was he born?



Who helped him?


<b>Write</b>



1.

<i>Read the massage. And then fill in the gaps in</i>


<i>the passage that follows with the information</i>

<i> </i>

.


* New words:



- delivery: ( translation)


- service: ( translation)



- furniture: ( show some things in class)


- customer: : ( translation)



- reach = call



- stationery: ( show some things in class)


- order : ( real thing )



Keys:



1.phoned 5.name


2. May 12 6. delivery


3. speak 7. Mr Ha


4. took 8. at



2.

<i>Now read the massage below. Write the </i>


<i>telephone massage in your exercises book:</i>


<i>* Write the telephone massage</i>

:




- Date: June 16



- Time: after midday.


- For : Mrs Van.



- Massage: Mr Nam called about his order. He


wanted you to call him at 8 634 082.



Taken by: Mr. Toan



3. Read the massage form on page 23 again, then


help Lisa write a massage for Nancy. Use the


information from the dialogue.



Date:………..Time:……….


For: Nancy



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

Nancy. Then write on the board.


Ss: Listen carefully and do as


requested.



T: Control and correct mistakes


again.



C. Consolidation

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Remark all period and note the


way to take a message.




D. Homework

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Ask ss to learn the way to


( write ) take a message.


- Do exercises again at home.



1:30



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<b> Period: 12 </b>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Thursday September 8</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>



<b> Unit 3: AT HOME</b>



<b>Lesson1: Getting Started & Listen and read</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By th e end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>


- Describe the ss’ chores.



- Talk about what ss have to do at home.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - Have to.



_ Vocabulary:- sweep, cupboard, steamer, saucepan, rice cooker, stove.


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Color chalk , cassette and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up: Chatting



T & ss ask about the chores.



B. New lesson

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>


1.



<i>Presentation</i>

:



T: From warming up , set situation


and ask ss to write the chores they


often do at home.



- Speak before class.



Ss: Try to make sentences and speak.



T: Set situation , read aloud and give


out the meaning of some new words.


_ Ask ss practice



Ss: Listen and copy down then


practice them.



T: Explain the way to use some


structures.



Ss: Listen and copy down.



2.

<i>Practice:</i>



T: Ask ss to look at the requested part



2 first and then practice dialogue .



1. Do you often help your parents?


2. Do you cook meals?



3. What do you often do the chores at home?



1.

<i>Getting started</i>

.



a, I often wash the dishes / washing up the


dishes.



b, I always make my bed.


c, I usually sweep the floor.


d, I sometimes cook the meals.


e, I often clean the tables and chairs.


f, I never feed the chicken.



2.

<i>Listen & read:</i>



a, New words:



- cupboard:( picture)


- steamer: ( picture)


- saucepan: ( picture)


- rice cooker: ( picture)


- stove: :( picture)



* Structure:




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

_ Find the information about the


dialogue.



Ss: Practice in pairs then do as the


requested.



T: Control and correct mistakes.



C. Consolidation:



T: Ask ss to find more actions about


the chores that sis often do at home.


Ss: try to do.



D. Homework:



T: Ask ss to learn new words at home


and do home work .



b, Practice the dialogue:


c, Complete the list:


_ cook dinner .



_ go to the market . Buy some fish &


vegetables..



_ Call aunt Chi & ask her to meet his mother


at Grandma’s house.



_ sweep the yard



_ wash the clothes



_ grow some vegetables.



<i><b> Period: 13 </b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Monday September 12</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>



<b> Unit 3: AT HOME</b>



<b>Lesson 2: SPEAK</b>



<b>I. Objectives : By th e end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>


- Practice about the position of the things.



- Practice speaking skill.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - review some of prepositions .


_ Vocabulary:- above, beneath , cushion, rug.


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Color chalk , real things, and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up: Brainstorm



T: Ask sis to find some of prepositions that


they’ve learned.




Ss: try to find.



B. New lesson

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



In between



Speak:



1.

<i>Talk about the position of each item:</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

1.



<i>Presentation</i>

<i>:</i>



T: Basing on some of prepositions , teacher


sets situation the requested of part 1 .



- First give some new words.



- Second ask sis to talk about the position of


each item in pairs.



- Then talk before class.


Ss: Listen and practice.



T: Control whole class and correct mistakes.



2.

<i>Practice</i>

:



T: Explain the title of the requested of part



2. Then give the sis some new words.


- practice new words.



Ss: Listen carefully and practice.


T: Ask sis to practice in pairs.



- Arrange the furniture then speak aloud


before class.



Ss: Listen and practice


- First in pairs.



- Then before class.



T: Remark and correct mistakes.



C. Consolidation

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Remark all period aloud , especially


about the prepositions.



Ss: Listen carefully.



D. Homework

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Ask sis to learn all prepositions at home.


_ Describe some furniture’s in ss’ houses.



- above: ( situation & translate )


- beneath: ( situation & translate )



_ the fruit is in the bowl.



_ The plate is on the table.



_ A vase of flower is on the table.



_ The pan and sauce pan are above the electric


cooker.



_ The table with the four chairs are in the


middle of the kitchen.



_ The fridge is inside the door.


_ A light fixture is above the table.


…..



2. Work with a partner and arrange the


furniture:



* New words:


- Rug: ( picture )



- cushion: ( real thing )


- coffee table: ( picture )


* Practice:



A: Let’s put the couch opposite the arm chairs.


B: Ok. And I think we ought to put the rug


between the armchairs and the couch.




A: Yes. And the chairs is near the coffee table ,


too.



B: That’s right. And the cushions are on the


couch.



A: Ok. Where does the TV go?


B: In the widest part of the shelf.



A: Ok. I think the clock is on the right of the


picture.



B: Where do you want the bookshelf?


A: I think It’s on the left of the couch.



B: And magazines are under the coffee table.


A: Yes, They are go.



B: How about the lamp?


……



<b>,</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b> Unit 3: AT HOME</b>



<b> Lesson 3: LISTEN</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By th e end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>


- listen and determine the information .



- Practice listening skill.



<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - Simple present.



_ Vocabulary:- garlic, green pepper, ham, teaspoon.


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ some real things



_ Cassette and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: control ss to ask and to answer about the


furniture’s at their houses.



Ss: practice in pairs.



T: Listen remark and give mark.


B.

<b> New lesson</b>

<b> :</b>



1.

<i>Pre-listening</i>

:

<i> </i>



T: Set situation and give some new words


then practice. Then listen once.



Ss: Listen , copy down and practice.




2.

<i>While- listening</i>

.



T: open to the tape 3 times and ask ss to


choose items in pairs or in group.



Tape transcript:



<b>Lan: Can I help you cook dinner, Mom?</b>


<b>Mrs Tu: Sure. You can cook the “Special </b>


Chinese Fried Rice ” for me. Use the big


pan.



<b>Lan: Okey. How much oil do I put it?</b>


<b>Mrs Tu: Just a little. Wait until it’s hot and </b>


then fry the garlic and the green peppers.


<b>Lan: Do I put the ham and the peas in now?</b>


<b>Mrs Tu: Yes. And can you put the rice and </b>


a teaspoon of salt in.



<b>Lan: Yummy! It smells delicious.</b>


_ Check their friends.



In, on , between, beneath, above, next to,


near…



LISTEN



1. New words:


- garlic:( real thing )




- green pepper: ( real thing )


- teaspoon: ( real thing )


- ham: ( translate )



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

_ Write on the board.


Ss: Listen and try to do



3.

<i>Post- listening:</i>



T: Play the tape again and check the right


answer.



Ss: Listen and correct mistakes.



C. Consolidation:



T: Remark all period and read again new


words.



Ss: Listen carefully.



D. Homework

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Ask ss to learn new words by heart and


do exercises at home.



b, pan.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

<b> Period: 15 </b>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Thursday September 15</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>




<b> Unit 3: AT HOME</b>



<b> Lesson 4: READ</b>



<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>


- Know about the content of the posters.



- Practice reading skill.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - review : must; have to; ought to .



_ Vocabulary:- match, electric socket, injure, bead, knife, object, precaution,


safety, scissors.



<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Color chalk , real things, and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warm up

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Hang on the sub-board on the board and ask


ss to fill the prepositions.



Ss: try to do




T: Remark and give mark.



B.

<b> New lesson</b>

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>


1.



<i>Presentation</i>

<i>:</i>



T: Introduce the poster and read first. Then


give the meaning some new words.



Ss: Listen and copy down.



T: Have ss to practice reading new words and


give time for ss reading the text.



_ Some of ss read aloud before class.


Ss: Do as requested.



2. Practice:



T: First guide ss to do this part, and ask ss to do


in pairs.



- Speak aloud before class.


Ss: try to do



T: Control and correct mistakes.



1. There is a bus station….. the end of this


road.




2. The boat sank………… the waves.


3. Mrs Nga said you could reach her


……….8 603 531.



4. Will you pick me ………..after the party?


5. The secretary took a message…….. her


boss



READ



1. New words:



- Precaution: ( translation )


- safety: ( translation )


- match: ( real thing )



- electric socket : ( real thing )


- injure: ( translation )



- bead: ( translation )


- knife: ( real thing )


- object: ( real thing )


- scissors: ( real thing )


2.

<i>Practice reading</i>

:


3.

<i>Answe</i>

r:



* True or False. Correct the false sentences:


a, False




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

T: Guide ss to answer with “ Why ” and then


ask them to practice in pairs , in group.



_ Write on the board.


Ss: Try to practice answer.



T: Control class and correct mistakes again.



C. Consolidation

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Remark and ask ss some questions.


Ss: Listen and try to answer.



D. Homework

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Ask ss to learn new words by heart .


_ Do exercises at home.



b, True


c, False



- A kitchen is a dangerous place to play.


d, False



- Playing with one match can cause a fire.


e, True



f, True



4.

<i>Ask and answer</i>

:




b, Because the kitchen is a dangerous place.


c, Because playing with matches can cause


fire



d. Because children mustn’t put anything


into electric sockets.



e, Because the dangerous objects can injure


or kill the children.



1. Should the children play with matches?


Why?



2. What should we do with dangerous


objects at home ?



<i><b> Period: 16 </b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> Monday September 19</sub></b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>



<b> Unit 3: AT HOME</b>



<b> Lesson 5: WRITE</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>



- Describe the living room, kitchen… basing on the pictures, words & phrases.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : - prepositions.



_ Vocabulary:- Wardrobe, counter, oven.



<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Color chalk ,and sub-board


<b>V. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A. Warming up

<b> :</b>

<b> Chatting</b>



T: Make the first example and ask ss to make



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

sentences continuous.


Ss: Look and try to do.



B.

<b> New lesson</b>

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>


1.



<i>Pre-writing</i>

:



T: First read , then give the meaning of the


new words.



- Ask ss to read the description aloud before


class.



Ss: Listen carefully and do as requested.


T: Listen and correct pronunciation.



2.

<i>While-writing:</i>




T: First give ss some of new words then


practice them.



- Guide ss to write a description.



Ss: Practice new words and try to write


T: Control class and ask some ss to write on


the board .



3.

<i>Post-listening</i>

:



T: Correct ss’ mistakes and give the correct


writing ( use sub-board )



Ss: Look and correct again.



C. Consolidation:



T: Remark all period and ask ss to write a


description of a room in your house.



Base on 2 paragraphs above.



Ss: Listen carefully and try to write, then


perform before class.



T: Control and correct their mistakes.



D. Homework

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>




T: Ask ss to read 2 paragraph above clearly



S1: There are………….


S2: There is a………


S3: there is a……….



<b>Write:</b>



1. Read the description of Hoa’s room.


a. New words:



- wardrobe: ( picture )


b. Practice reading:



2.

<i>Now write a description of this kitchen:</i>



* New words:



- counter: ( picture )


- oven: ( picture )


* Write:



This is Hoa’s kitchen.



There is a refrigerator in the right corner of


the room.



Next to the refrigerator is the oven and


stove.




On the right side of the oven, there is a sink


and next to the sink is a towel rack.



The disk rack is on counter, on the right of


the window and beneath the shelves.



On the shelves and on the counter beneath


the window, there are jars of sugar, flour


and tea.



In the middle of the kitchen, there is a table


with four chairs.



The lighting fixture is above the table, and


beneath the lighting fixture is a vase of


flowers.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<i><b>Period: 17 Tuesday September 20</b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>



<b> Unit 3: AT HOME</b>



<b> Lesson 6 LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to:</b>


- Review knowledge they’ve learnt



- Use structures to practice exercises.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar :




- Reflexive pronouns



- Modals: must, have to, ought to.


- Why_ Because.



<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Color chalk ,some picture and sub-board


_ Network



<b>V. Procedures :</b>



<i><b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b></i>

<i><b>Contents</b></i>



A.



<b> Warming up</b>

<b> : Brainstorm</b>


T: Ask ss to write all reflexives


Ss: Try to write.



B.

<b> New lesson:</b>


1.



<i>Presentation</i>

:



T: From warming up , teacher remark and


let ss to practice exercises .



Ss: Listen and do then speak aloud before


class.




2.

<i>Practice:</i>



T: Explain the way to use have to & must


aloud then guide ss to do exercises.



- Practice before class in pairs.


Ss: Listen and try to practice.


T: Listen and correct mistakes



T: Set situation and take example first then



myself



1.

<i>Complete the dialogue</i>

:

<i> </i>



b………(1) ourselves.



c……….(2) myself ……(3) yourself……..


d……….(4) himself…….(5) herself………


(6) themselves.



e. ………(7) yourself………


2.



<i>Complete the dialogue .Use </i>

must

<i>or </i>

have to



<i>and the verb in the box</i>

:


<b>Feed – empty - do – tidy – sweep – </b>



<b>clean – dust .</b>



<b>Lan: (1)…..must/ have to tidy……(2)……… </b>


have to/ must dust………(3) must/ have



sweep…………



Lan: (4)……must/ have to clean……..(5)have


to/ must empty………….(6)must/ have to feed



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

let ss practice exercises in pairs.



Ss: Listen carefully and practice exercises.


_ Practice before class.



T: Control whole class and correct


mistakes.



C.

<b> Consolidation</b>

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Remark all period loud.


- Ask ss some questions


Ss: Try to answer



D. Homework

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>



T: Ask ss to learn structure by heart and


do exercises.



3.

<i>Look at the pictures. Use ought to give </i>



<i>advice to these people</i>

<i> </i>

.



Ex: I failed my English test.


→ You ought to study harder.


b. You ought to get up earlier.


c. You ought to be on diet.



d. You ought to go to the dentist.



4.

<i>Work with a partner</i>

:



b. Why did Nam have to cook dinner ?


- Because his mother was home late.



c. Why was Mrs Vui, Nam’s mother home late?


- Because she had to see Nam’s grandmother.


d. Why did Ha fail her English exam ?



- Because she didn’t learn hard for her exam.


e. Why didn’t go to the movies ?



- Because she had to do her chores.



1. Do you often help your mom?


2. Do you often cook meals?



3. What do you often do in your free time?


…..



<i><b>Period: 18 Thursday September 22</b></i>

<i><b>nd</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>




<b> </b>


<b>REVISION</b>



<b>I . Objectives</b>

<b> : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to</b>


- Can review knowledge form Unit 1 to Unit 3


<b>II. Language contents ::</b>



Grammar :- The simple tenses



- (not) adj + Adj + enough + to infinitive ..


- Be going to : to talk about intentions


- Adverbs of place



- Reflexive pronouns



- Model verbs: must, have to, ought to


Vocabulary :



<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b>IV. Procedures : </b>



<i><b>Teacher and student’s activities</b></i>

<b>Contents</b>



-T recall the grammar.



<b>A: Grammar</b>


1.The simple tenses




a

<i>. The present simple tense</i>



Form: S + V / V s/se...


Use: to talk about general truths


b.

<i>The past simple tense</i>



Form: S + V ed/ 2....



Use: to talk about the actions happened and finÝhed


in the time in the part



2.Enough: dủ



a

<i>.An adjective: Enough + Noun + to inf</i>



Ex: he has enough time to do the work



b.

<i>An adverb: S+be (not) + adv/adj enough + (for </i>


<i>sb)+ to ifn</i>



Ex: she is old enough to drive a car.


he studied hard to pass the exam.


3.Be going to:



Form S + be going to + v



Use: diễn tả diều gì quyết dịnh trước khi nói.tiên


đốn điều gì chắc chắn điều gì xảy ra trong tương lai.


Sự kiện xảy ra tương lai gần.




Ex: I feel terrible. I am going to be sick.


* Notes: “Will” and “Be going to’



Will: -Diễn tả sự tiên đoán dựa vào ý kiến cá nhân


Ex: It will rain. it often rains tat that time of this year


-Diễn tả quyết đinh lúc nói



Ex: The phone is ringing. I’ll anwer it



Be going to: -Tiên đoán sự việc chắc chắn xảy ravì có


chứng cứ hay dâu hiệu ở hiện tại



Ex:Lookn at the black clouds. it is going to rain.


Diển tả ý định đã quyết định hay sắp xếp trước khi


nói



Ex:Are you busy this afternoon?Yes, I’m going to see


a film



4.Reflexive pronouns:



-Đại từ phản thân được diễn tả khi người hoặc vật


chiu ảnh hưởng chính hành động của mình.



Ex: I cut mysẽlf



-Dùng nhấn mạnh cho chủ ngử, đứng sau chủ từ hoặc


cuối câu



Ex: She cleaned the floor herself.



She herself cleaned the floor.


-By + reflexive pronoun : một mình


Ex: Nga did the cake by herself.



5.Model verbs: Must, Have to, ought to



a.Must:Diễn tả sự bắt bộuc có tính chủ quan hoặc cảm


nghĩ của người nói.



Ex: Tom must be home before 7 pm



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

-T hangs the exercise on the board


and ask SS to do



(work invidaully.



-T corrects ang and give answer key.



-The same method



-The same method



kháck quan hay do yếu tố bên ngoài.



Ex: Your eyes are weak. You have to wear glasses.


c.Ought to: Diễn tả lời khuyen.



Ex: We ought to obey our parents.


6.Why....? hỏi lí do




Why + aux. V + S + V +O...? Because + clause


B. Exercises



I.

<i>Combine each of pairs of sentences into one </i>


<i>sentences, using (not) adj + enough + to inf</i>



1.He is tall. He can play volleyball.


2.My sister is old. She can drive a car.



3.The radio isn’t small. you can’t put it in your


pocket.



4.Those apples aren’t ripe. We can’t eat them



5.The worker is clever. he can make fine things from


woods.



II.

<i>Say what the people are going to do.</i>



1.I feed very tired. ( take a day off)



2.My uncle has won some money. (buy a new car)


3.I’ll have an annual holiday next month.(visit Nha


Trang)



4.We have bought some bricks. (built a yard)


5.Linh is studying medicine. (be a doctor)



III

<i>. Complete the sentences using ‘Will’ or ‘going to’</i>




1.Look at those black clouds. It...is going to ...


(rain)



2.I think Lan...will.. (like)...the present we bought


for her.



3.This cheese look horrible. I...am going to... (eat).


4.I feed terrible I think...am going to.. (be) sick.



5.Tom..won’t..(not/pass) the exam. He hasn’t studied


hard enough



<i><b>Period: 19 Monday September 26</b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>



Written Test 45’ No 1



<b>I/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>


<b>*Language focus: </b>



Know the way to use the vocabularies / modal verbs


the reflexible pronouns / Why - because



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b> A conversation about making arrangement</b>


<b> * Writing</b>

<i><b> : </b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>



<i> Do as directed</i>

:


<b>* Listening</b>



<i><b> </b></i>

<i>Listen and make true(T) or false (F</i>


<b>II/ Language conents :</b>




Use the content of the knowledge in the unit



1(My friends), 2(Making arrangement), 3(At home):


<b>III/ Teaching aids: </b>



- Prepositions Model verbs Vocab Reflexive pro. Because


<b>IV/ Procedures:</b>



CHỦ ĐỀ

NHẬN BIẾT

THÔNG HIỂU

VẬN DỤNG

TỔNG



TNKQ

TL

TNKQ

TL

TNKQ

TL



<b>I/Language focus:</b>



1

3

1

5



<b>II/ Reading:</b>



2

3

0

5



<b>III/Writing:</b>


<b> </b>




0





4

1





5


<b>IV/Listening:</b>







0





5

0




5


<b>Tổng</b>







3

15

2

20


<b>A. Language Focus</b>



<i><b>I/ Put suitable word(s) or phrase(s) in each blank</b></i>



1/ This morning you…………go to school on time to do the test


2/ She has to cook dinner ………..because her parents are out



3/ Mai is tall and slim , she has has along black hair …….an around face


4/ ………you do your Math homework yesterday night? – Yes, I did.


5/ The weather is not hot………..for us to swim in the river.


<b>B. Reading</b>



<i><b>II/ Fill in the dialogue with suitable words </b></i>


<b> A conversation</b>



Call

pick

leave

I’ll tell her

am calling



<i>Hoa’ mother:</i>

8549632145



<i>Mai:</i>

Can I speak to Hoa , please?



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

<i>Mai :</i>

Oh,yes.I’m Mai. I...to tell her that the English –speaking contest will


start earlier tonight. We are going to go there soon. I’ll ... her up at 6 pm.



<i>Hoa’ mother:</i>

OK! Mai. I... about when she ‘s back. Thank you very much.



<i>Mai: </i>

You are welcome. Goodbye



<i>Hoa’ mother:</i>

Bye



<b>C/ Writing: Do as directed:</b>



1. The weather is warm. We can go out. (Use “enough” to combine)



2. you / where / to / tonight / are / go / going/? (put these words in the correct order)


3. Kitchen is a suitable place for childen to play (correct the mistake)




4. Oh no I forgot. I (telephone) for them now. ( put the correct verb tense )


5. We shouldn’t climb to that moutain. It’s dangerous



We shouldn’t climb to that moutain. It’s dangerous


( Rewrite sentence using : adj+enough+to infinitive)


<b>D/ Listening</b>



<i><b>IV / Listen and make true(T) or false (F): </b></i>


MY FRIEND.



...1/ He is tall and thin


...2/ He is helpful



...3/ He likes to wear Jeans


...4/ His interest is writing



………5/ He often goes to the library in his free time



- THE END –



<i><b>Period: 20 Thursday September 28</b></i>

<i><b>th</b></i>

<i><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>



<b>CORRECTION TEST</b>



<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>


<b> - Correct ss’ mistakes they’ve done.</b>


<b>A. Language Focus</b>



<i><b>I/ Put suitable word(s) or phrase(s) in each blank</b></i>




1/ This morning you……must……go to school on time to do the test



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

5/ The weather is not hot……enough…………..for us to swim in the river.


<b>B. Reading</b>



<i><b>II/ Fill in the dialogue with suitable words </b></i>


<b> A conversation</b>



<b>1/Call 2/pick 3/leave 4/I’ll tell her 5 /am calling</b>



<i>Hoa’ mother:</i>

8549632145



<i>Mai:</i>

Can I speak to Hoa , please?



<i>Hoa’ mother:</i>

Sorry, she’ out. Would you like to... leave... a message or... Call... her


later?



<i>Mai :</i>

Oh,yes.I’m Mai. I... am calling... to tell her that the English –speaking contest


will start earlier tonight. We are going to go there soon. I’ll ... pick.... her up at 6 pm.



<i>Hoa’ mother:</i>

OK! Mai. I... I’ll tell her... about when she ‘s back. Thank you very


much.



<i>Mai: </i>

You are welcome. Goodbye



<i>Hoa’ mother:</i>

Bye



<b>C/ Writing: Do as directed:</b>



1. The weather is warm. We can go out. (Use “enough” to combine)



<i>The weather is warm enough for us to go out</i>



2. you / where / to / tonight / are / go / going/? (put these words in the correct order)


<b> W</b>

<i>here are you going to go tonight </i>

<i><b>?</b></i>



3. Kitchen is a suitable place for childen to play (correct the mistake)


<i>Kitchen is a dangerous place for childen to play</i>



4. Oh no I forgot. I (telephone) for them now. ( put the correct verb tense )


<i>Oh no I forgot. I will telephone for them now. </i>



5. We can’t do the exercise. It’s too difficult


. ( Rewrite sentence using : adj+enough+to infinitive)
It’s not easy enough for us to do the exercise


<b>D/ Listening</b>


<i><b>IV / Listen and make true(T) or false (F): </b></i>


<b>MY FRIEND</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

.


....F...1/ He is tall and thin
...T...2/ He is helpful


... T...3/ He likes to wear Jeans
...F...4/ His interest is wrting



……T…5/ He often goes to the library in his free time
<b> Period: 21 Friday September 29</b><i><b>th</b><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>

<b> Unit4 : OUR PAST</b>



<b> Lesson 1: Getting Started & Listen and read</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>


- talk about even in the past.


- distinguish between the fact & opinion
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : - used to / had to.


_ Vocabulary:- folktale, tale, traditional.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk ,real thing cassette and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up: chatting


T & Ss Ask and answer some questions.
B. New lesson:


1.


<i><b> </b><b> Presentation</b><b> :</b></i>



T: From warming up teacher asks ss to name
some of the things that do not belong to the past.
Ss: Look and try to find the name.


T: Remark


T: Set situation , read the dialogue first and give
out some of the new words.


_ Then practice new words.
Ss: Listen, copy and practice.
T: Explain the structure.
Ss: Look and copy.


1. Do you have a mobile phone ?


2. Do you wear uniform to school? When ?


2. Do your family have a lighting fixture 50 years
ago.


I. Getting started .
- the television.
- the stereo.


- the mobile phone.
- the lighting fixture.
- the modern clothing.
- school uniform.


- address.


- shoes


II. Listen and read.
1. New words:


- folktale :( real thing )
- tale: ( translation)
- traditional: ( translation)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

2. Practice:


T: Ask ss to practice dialogue in pairs first and
practice ask and answer the questions.


Ss: Listen and practice in pairs before class.
T: Control whole class and correct their
mistakes.


T: Explain the way to do exercise first and
practice exercise then check cross .


Ss: Listen and try to do then speak before class.
T: Listen and correct again.


C. Consolidation<b> : </b>


T: Remark all period and ask ss to write some
sentences about action in the past.



D. Homework:


T: Ask ss to learn , do exercises again at home.


3. Work with a partner. Ask and answer the
questions:


a. She used to live on the farm.


b. Because she had to stay home to help her mom.
c. she used to cook the meals, clean the house and
wash the clothes.


d. Her great-grandmother used to lit the lamp and her
great-grandfather used to tell them stories.


e. She asked her grandmother to tell her the tale “ The
Lost Shoe ”


4. Fact or Opinion? Check in the boxes.
a._ F d._ F


b._ F e._ O
c._ F f._ O


<b>OUR PAST</b>



<i><b>Period: 22 Monday October 3</b><b>rd</b><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>



<b> </b>


<b>Unit4 : OUR PAST </b>



<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 2: SPEAK & </b>

<b>Language focus 4</b>



<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>


- Talk about the differences between the life today and the life in the past.
- Do exercise on text book


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : - S + used to + V
- S + didn’t use to + V
- Did + S + use to + V
_ Vocabulary:-foolish, greedy, gold .
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk ,real thing
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up<i><b> :</b><b> Chatting</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

B. New lesson.
1. Presentation<i> : </i>


T: Set situation and present structure on the


board first then ask ss to practice talking
things used to be and the way are now.
Ss: Listen and copy down then practice in
group first.


- Speak aloud before class.


T: Listen and correct their mistakes.


2. Practice:


T: Explain and make the first example.
Then ask ss try to find these things they used
to do last year.


Ss: Look and listen and try to do first then
speak aloud before class in pairs.


T: Listen and correct again.


T: let ss gap- filling and read aloud before
class.


Ss: Listen and try to do.


T: Control and correct mistakes


2. When I was young , I used to………
3. When I was 10 years old, I used to…………
4. Two years go, I used to ……….


5. Last year I used to……….


1. Work with a partner. Talk the way things used to be
and the way are now.


* Structure:
_ S + used to + V
_ S + didn’t use to + V
_ Did + S + V…?
* Practice :


a. People used to live in small houses. Now people live in
big houses and building.


b. People used to walk to travel. Now , they can go by
car, motorbike or plane…


c. There didn’t used to be electricity in the home. Now,
there is electricity everywhere.


d. People used to work hard all the time. Now, they have
a lot of time for entertainment.


e. Children used to stay at home. Now, they go to school.
2. Now tell your partner about the things you used to do
last year.


- Last year, I used to get up early
- Last year, I used to get up late.



- Last year , I used to get bad grades, and now I always
get good grades.


- Last year , I used to ………
<b>* Language focus 4</b>


4. Look at the pictures. Complete the dialogue.
<i>Use “ used to ” and the verbs in the box.</i>


Nga: Where is this ? It isn’t in Hanoi.
Hoa: No, it’s Hue. I used to stay there.
Nga: Is that you , Hoa ?


Hoa: Yes, I used to have long hair.
Nga: Who is in this photo.


Hoa: That is Loan. She used to be my next-door
neighbor.


Nga: Are they your parents?


Hoa: No, They’re my aunt and uncle. They used to live in
Hue, too.


<i>Further exercises:</i>


1. I ( do)………. my homework last night.
2. We used ( get)………..late in the morning.
3. Our parents ( take )……….. us to the zoo last
week.



4. They ( buy )……… a new car yesterday.
5. What………..you (do)………….. last night?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

.


<i><b>Period: 23 Tuesday October 11</b><b>th</b><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>


<b> </b>


<b>Unit4 : OUR PAST</b>



<b> </b>

<b>Lesson LISTEN & LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2,3</b>
<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>


- Listen to the tape about a story and make the moral lesson
- review some grammars and practice more exercises.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Review - Simple past tense.
- Used to


_ Vocabulary:
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



A.


<b> Warming up : Chatting</b>


T: Let ss write some activities they used to do.
B. New lesson:


*.


Pre-listening


Ss: Listen and try to do.


T: Set situation and give out some of new
words.


- Practice new words and guide ss the way to
do.


Ss: Listen and copy down.
*. While- listening:


T: Play the tape for ss listening 3 times and
then check cross first.


Ss: Listen carefully and try to write the letter
of the most suitable moral lesson.


T: Control whole class.
*.



Post-listening :


T: First ask ss check cross
- Write on the board.
Ss: Listen and try to do.


T: Correct mistake and give the right answer (
use sub-board )


1. I used to………
2. I used to………
3. I used to………
4. I used to………
5. I used to………
Listen


* New words:
- foolish: (trans)
- greedy: (trans)
- gold :(real thing)
* Transcription:


Once a farmer lived a comfortable life with his family.
His chickens laid many eggs which the farmer used to
sell to buy food and clothing for his family.


One day, he went to collect the eggs and discovered
one of the chickens laid a gold egg. He shouted
excitedly to his wife, “ We’re rich ! We’re rich ! ”


His wife ran to him and they both look at the egg in
amazement. The wife wanted more, so her husband
decided to cut open all the chickens and find more gold
eggs. Unfortunately, he couldn’t find any eggs. When
he finished all, the chickens were dead.


There were no more eggs of kind for foolish and his
greedy wife.


Key answer:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

Presentation


T: Ask ss to write the simple past tense form
of verb


Ss: Look and try to write
T: Correct mistakes.


T: First guide ss the ways to do then ask ss to
practice exercises in pairs.


Ss: Practice in pairs and read aloud before
class.


T: Control and correct mistakes


T: Guide ss to complete the dialogue.


Ss: First practice in pairs in silent and perform


before class.


T: Control and correct mistakes.
*.


Presentation :


T: Take some about the prepositions of time.
Ss: Listen and copy down.


C. <b> Consolidation : </b>


- Remark all period clearly aloud.


- Correct the test they’ve done( correct in
oral )


- Ss listen carefully and correct again in their
boobs.


- Give some exercises.
D. Homework:


- ask ss to do exercises at home again.
- do exercises


<b>Language focus</b>


1.Write the past simple tense form of each verb.
a. run → ran. g. be → was/were


b. fly → flew h. ride → rode
c. take→ took i. eat → ate
d. go → went j. sit → sat
e. have→ had k. come→ came
f. do → did


2. Complete the dialogue below. Use the past simple.
a.Lan: Did you eat rice for lunch ?


Nga: No, I ate noodles.


b.Ba: How did you get to school ?
Nam: I rode a bicycle to school.


c. Minh: Where were you yesterday?


Hoa: I was at home.


d.Chi: Which subjects did you have yesterday?
Ba : I had Math


3. Complete the sentences. Use the prepositions in the
<i>table . </i>


- In : month, year, month and year.
- on: days


- at : time


Between: time and time…..


a. I’ll see you on Wednesday.
b. I’m going to Laos in January.


c. We must be there between 8.30 and 9.15.


d. The bank closes before 3pm. If you arrive after 3pm
the bank will be closed.


e. I’ll be home at seven because I want to see the seven
o’clock news.


<i><b> Period: 24 Thursday October 14</b><b>th</b><b><sub> , 2011 </sub></b></i>


<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

<b> </b>

<b> Lesson 3: READ</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>
- Practice reading comprehension skill.


- Ask and answer to base on the passage.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : - Simple past tense.


_ Vocabulary:- upset, cruel, festival, appear, fairy, rug, magically, own.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk and sub-board
_ Chatting



<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up<b> : </b>


T & Ss talk about some tale stories.
B. New lesson


1.


<b> Pre-reading :</b>


T: Set situation and ask ss to guess the content of
the story basing on the title .


- Do you know this story?
Ss: Listen and try to answer.


T: Read and give out the meaning of some new
words. Then practice them.


Ss: Listen , copy down and practice.
* Checking new words:


- Rub out and remember
2. While-reading:


T: Let ss read the text in silent and read aloud


before class.


- Read again and complete sentences in group.
Then read each sentence aloud.


Ss: Listen and do as directed.
T: Control whole class.
3. Post- reading:


T: Let ss read the text again and answer the
questions in pairs.


Ss: Listen and try to do. Then practice aloud
before class.


T: Control and correct mistakes .Then give right
answer.( use sub-board )


C. Consolidation<b> : </b>


T: Remark all period aloud and ask ss some


Do you often read the tale? Name some of stories.
<b>Read</b>


1. New words:


-Unfortunately # fortunately
- cruel :( translation)



- upset : ( mine )
- festival ( picture )
- appear: ( translation)
- fairy :( translation)
- rag : ( translation)
- magically :( translation)
- own : ( translation)
2. Complete sentences:
a…..a poor farmer
b……died………
c…….used……again


d………marry / choose…….
e. …………new clothes………..
f…………lost………


3. Answer questions:


a. She was a poor farmer’s daughter.


b. She made Little Pea do the chores all day.
c. Before the festival started, a fairy appeared and
magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes.
d. The prince decided to marry the girl who fitted the
lost shoe.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

questions


1. What do you think about the story?
2. Do you like the tale ?



3. How many stories do you read?
4. Are they good stories ?


Ss: Listen and try to answer.
D. Homework:


_ Ask ss to learn new words by heart.
_ Do exercises at home.


<b> </b>


<b> Period: 25 Monday October 17th , 2011 </b>
<b> </b>


<b>Unit 4 : OUR PAST</b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 4: WRITE</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>
- At the end of this lesson ss can :


- Rewrite the story & use the correct form of the verbs
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Review - Simple past tense


_ Vocabulary:- servant, master, wisdom, rope, straw.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk and sub-board


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up:


T: Ask ss to write the past form
Ss: Look and try to write
B. New lesson


1. Pre-writing<i> : </i>


T: Set situation and give some new words then
practice them


Ss: Listen, copy down and practice.
2. While- writing<i> :</i>


T: Guide and let ss complete the story in group
first then speak aloud before class.


Ss: Listen and do as directed.


T: Control and correct mistakes and give them
the keys


1 see →
2 take →
3. fly →
4. appear →


5. eat →
Write


1. New words:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

T: First guide ss to do . then let ss imagine and
use the words to write the story in 4 groups
Ss: Listen and try to do and then write on the
sub-board.


T: Control and correct mistakes for each group.
3. Post- writing:


T: Have ss read whole the writing aloud before
class.


- Fill in the blank some sentences.
Ss: Try to do.


C. Consolidation<b> : </b>


- Remark all period aloud.


D. Homework:


- Ask ss to write the story again and prepare next
period.


4. left
5. went



3. Now imagine you are the man. Use the words to
<i>write the story. Start like this:</i>


One day ,as in the field and my buffalo was grazing
nearby, a tiger came. It asked why the strong buffalo
was my servant and why I was its master. I told the
tiger that I had something called wisdom. The tiger
wanted to see it, but I told it I left the wisdom at home .
Then I tied the tiger to a tree with a rope because I
didn’t want it eat my buffalo. I went to get some straw
that I said was my wisdom and I burned the tiger. The
tiger escaped, but it still has black stripes from the
burns.


* Further practice


1. Yesterday afternoon, I ……….. soccer with
my friends


2. Last night, We ……….. an interesting
movie.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<i><b>Period: 26 Tuesday October 18</b><b>th</b><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>

<b> Unit 5 : STUDY HABITS</b>



<b>Lesson 1: Getting Started & Listen and read</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>


- Practice more about subjects at school.


- Know about the report card at school.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar :Review- How often…..?
_ Vocabulary:


- report card, excellent, be proud of, semester, improve, pronunciation.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk ,real thing cassette and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up : chatting


T T & ss ask and answer some questions.
B. New lesson<b> : </b>


1.


Presentation :


T: Form warming up, teacher asks ss practice “
ask and answer” in pairs before class.


Ss: Listen and try to make questions and
answer .


T: Control and correct mistakes.



T: Set situation and play the tape once then
give ss some new words.


- Practice new words in chorus , independent.
Ss: Listen and copy down then practice.


2. Practice<i> : </i>


T: Let ss look at the True, False questions and
guess first .


_ Then play the tape 2 times and ask ss to play
the role and read aloud before class.


- Answer keys
Ss: Do as requested.


T: Correct again and let ss practice answering
the comprehension questions in pairs.


Ss: Listen and try to do
T: Control and help ss to do.


1. What subject do you have today?
2. Do we have English today ?
3. How often do we have English?
I. Getting started:


1. How often do we have Math?


- We have Math four times a week.
- Physics


- literature
- biology


- physical education
- chemistry


………
II. Listen and read<b> : </b>
1. New words:


- report card: ( real thing)
- excellent: ( translation )


- be proud of : : ( translation + ex)
Ex: I’m proud of you are a good ss.
- semester: : ( translation )


- improve: : ( translation )
- pronunciation: ( translation )
2. True or False:


a. F d. T
b. T e. F
c. F f. T


3. Answer the questions:



a. Miss Jackson is Tim’s teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

C. Consolidation<b> : </b>


T: Ask some questions about ss.
Ss: Try to answer.


D. Homework<b> : </b>


- Ask ss to learn new words and answer the
questions in ss’ books.


- Do exercises.


c. Tim studies very well this semester.


d. Miss Jackson said Tim should work harder on his
Spanish pronunciation.


e. She gave him a dictionary.
4. Further practice:


1. Do you study hard ?


2. Do you often have report card well.
3. Which subject do you need to improve ?


<i><b>Period: 27 Thursday October 20</b><b>th</b><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>

<b>Unit 5 : STUDY HABITS</b>




<b> Lesson 2: </b>

<b>speak + listen</b>




I, <b>Objectives : </b> By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to
- Talk about their studies


Ss can listen and understand about the personal information and studying result


<b>II. Language contents</b>:


Vocab : Day present, behavior, making period,
co-operation, comment, signature.
participation, satisfactory, fail
Grammar : Review simple present


<b>III. Teaching aids</b>:


Cassette + tape. Pictures


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


1, <b>Warm up</b>


- Write newwords


- Read the text and answer questions


<b>2. Speak</b>



<b>Pre - speaking</b> :


- Asks to read all the questions
- Guides how to answer


<b> While - speaking</b>


- Work in pairs (5')
- T asks some Ss first


- Calls some pairs to ask and answer
- Corrects mistakes


<b> Post - speaking</b> :


- Asks Ss to say something about their studying
habit


* Work in groups.Ask each other about your studies.
1.When do you do your homework ?


- I do my homework after school
after dinner
late at night
2.Who helps you with your homework ?
- My parents help me with my homework
My brothers


My friends



3. How much time do you spend on Math?
- I spend half an hour on Math.


an hour on English


4.Which subject do you need to improve ?
- I need to improve Biology


Physics


5.What do you do to improve your English
- I do grammar exercises


read English stories


Ex: I often do my homework after dinner


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

- then, asks Ss to say about their partner’s
studies.


<b>3. Listen</b>


<b>Pre - listening :</b>


- Ss read the information in the card
- Find the new words


- Practice new words



- Asks Ss to guess how to complete


<b>While - listening</b>


- Listen to the tape (3 times) and complete
- Check with a partner


- Give the answer keys


- Listen sentence by sentence to check
- Corrects mistakes


<b>Post - listening</b>


- Asks some questions about the dialogue:
+ How many days was Susan absent ?
+ How is her speaking and reading ?


- some excellent Ss tell about their studying


*Listen to the dialogue and complete the report card
New words


-

day present (n)

-

attendance (n)


-

behavior-participation (n)

-

making-period (n)


-

comment (n)


-

fail (a)

-

encourage (v)


-

satisfactory (a)

-

signature (n)


-

co-operation (n)
Keys :


1, 87 days present
2, 5 days absent
3, Participation : S
4, Listening : C
5, Speaking : A
6, Reading : A
7, Writing : B


<b>4. Homework</b>


-

write about your studyinghabits


-

guides Ss how to do exercises 1, 2 (page 32,33- SBT)

-

prepare read


<i><b>Period: 28 Monday October 24</b><b>th</b><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>

<b>Unit 5 : STUDY HABITS</b>



<b> Lesson 3: READ + Exercise 1</b>




<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>
- practice to ask and answer ( true or false).
- practice reading skills


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : - Present simple tense.


_ Vocabulary: list, mother tongue, underline, highlight, revision.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warmer: Ask & answer
T: Ask ss some questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

B. New lesson
1. Pre-reading


T: Set situation and give out some new words.
Then practice them.


Ss: Listen, copy and practice in chorus and
independent.


2. While-reading:



T: ask ss to guess True or False sentences first ,
then practice reading text in silently.


Ss: Listen and try to do as requested. Then give
these answer.


T: Listen and check again.
3. Post- reading:


T: Practice reading the text
Ss: Listen and do.


T: Listen and correct their mistakes.
3. Consolidation:


* Further practice<b> : </b>


T: Ask ss some question about learning English.
Ss: Listen and try to answer.


T: Control and correct mistakes.
D. Homework<i><b> .</b><b> </b></i>


_ Ask ss to learn new words and do exercises at
home.


2. Who often helps you to do your homework?
3. How much time do you often learn English class?
4. Do you good at English?



5. How do you learn
Read


1. New words.
- list: ( action )


- mother tongue: ( translation + ex)
Ex: Vietnamese is my mother tongue
- underline: ( action )


- highlight: ( action )
- revision: ( translation)
2. True or False:


a. F c. T
b. T d. F


<i><b>Period: 29 Tuesday October 25</b><b>th</b><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>

<b>Unit 5 : STUDY HABITS</b>



<b> Lesson 4: READ + Exercise 2</b>




<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>
- Understand the text


- Do exercise 2 in textbook
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : - Present simple tense.


_ Vocabulary: review.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

_ Color chalk , and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


1, <b>Warm up </b> :


-

Write new words
2, <b>Pre-reading</b>


-

Shows the pictures and asks Ss some
questions:


+ How many English words do you try to learn
everyday ?


+ How do you learn new words ?
- gives new words ( When Ss answer )
- Practice new words


- rubs out and remember
3, <b>While - reading</b>


<b>- T asks Ss to read the text in silence (2')</b>


-

T asks some yes / no questions
+ Do all learners write the meaning of the
newwords in their mother tongue ?


+ Do some learners make sentences with
newwords ? (etc)


- Guides Ss how to do exercise 1


- Ss work in pairs (2’)Then give the answers
- Corrects mistakes


- Asks Ss read all questions and the text again to
find the answers


- Work in pairs (2')


- One asks and one answers
- Some others repeat.


- Some write down on the board
- corrects mistakes


4, <b>Post- reading</b>


- Ss retell the ways to learn newwords


<i><b>New words : </b></i>
- piece of paper (n)
- list (n) danh s¸ch


- mother tongue (n) tiếng mẹ đẻ
- learn by heart (v) học thuộc lòng


- in order to = so as to: để mà
- stick (v) = label dán
- come across (v): gặp tình cờ
- underline (v) gạch chân
- highlight (v) làm nổi bật
- revise (v) ôn tập  revision (n)


1,<b>Tick " T "or "F "</b>


a, F c, F
b, T d, T


2, <b>Answer the questions</b>


3.


Answer the questions:
a. No, They don’t.


b. Because they help them remember the use of new
words.


c. To remember words better, learners write examples,
put the words and their meaning on stickers. Underline
or highlight them.


d. They may think they can’t do so. Instead, they learn
only important words .


e. Revision is necessary in learning words.



f. Learners should try different ways of learning words
to find out what is the best.


1. Do you good at English?


2. How should you learn the new words?


3. What do you do in order to remember words?


FIFITEEN MINUTES TEST 1
C©u 1: It is a. ...to meet you, Miss Lien


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

A. new B. slim C. fair D. dark


C©u 4: I... a letter from my a friend last week.
A. sent B. received C. give D. took


C©u 5. Her friends sometimes get tired ...her jokes
A. with B. to C. of D. for


C©u 6. We are ...enough to have a lot of friends.
A. lucky B. luckily C. luck D. luckyly
C©u 7 What ... he like? He is humorous and helpful.
A. does B. is C. are D. do


C©u 8. He worked with... at Boston University
A. deaf - mute B. mute C. deaf-mutes D. blind
C©u 9. It' s ... far from my house to school.



A.a few B. few C. a bit D. many
C©u 10. Would you like ...her a message?
A. to leave B. leave C. leaving D. left
C©u 11.You use a ... to cook rice.


A.steamer B.rice cooker C. saucepan D.fryingpan


C©u 12. A-Is Peter in ? B-No, he's out. Would you like to leave
A...?


A.message B.letter C.telephone D.call


C©u 13. can't go to the cinema tonight. I ...do my homework.
A.has to B.had to C.have to D. ought


C©u14.Ba drew the picture ...


A.hisself B.myself C.himself D.herself


C©u 15.You have to make ...children do not play with matches.
A. ensure B. surely C.ensuring D. sure


C©u 16. .It's safe...medicine in locked cupboards.
A. keep B. kept C. to keep D. keeping


C©u 17. We ...put the wardrobe in the corner opposite the bed.
A. ought B. ought to C. must D. will have


C©u18...are you crying ,Nga ?



A.What B.How C . Why D.When


C©u19. Mr Tan: “Students, you’ll have to do the exercises...”


A. yourself B. themselves C. ourselves D. yourselves
c©u 20. The opposite of “above” is...


A. on B. in C . beneath D. out


<i><b>Period: 30 Thursday October 27</b><b>th</b><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>

<b>Unit 5 : STUDY HABITS</b>


<b> Lesson </b>

<b>4: WRITE</b>



<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:</b>
- Write a letter to their friends


- Develop writing skills
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : - Past simple tense and future tense.
_ Vocabulary:


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

A. Warmer : Ask & answer
T: Ask ss some questions
Ss: Try to answer.



B. New lesson
1.


<b> Pre-writing</b>


T: Set situation and guide ss to do this
exercises.


Ss: Look and try to do
T: take notes.


2. While- writing:


T: From correcting order letter part 1. T explain
the way to write and divide class into 4 groups.
Ss: Ss listen and write.


- Cross checking


- Then write 4 paragraphs on the board.
T: Control and correct mistakes.


3, Post- writing


T: Use sub- board and show clearly their
mistakes again.


- Ask ss read aloud the letter.
Ss: Listen carefully and read.



C. Consolidation


- T: Remark and ask ss to write a letter to their
friends, basing on 2 letters above.


Ss: Listen and try to write.
D. Homework


- ask ss to write a letter at home again.


1. What do you often do after school?
2. Do you good at Math?


3. How should you do in Math?


4. What is necessary in learning Math?
Write


1. Look at Hoa’s letter to Tim. She wrote it at the end
<i>of term. Identify the sections. Label them with correct</i>
<i>letter.</i>


* Key.


B _ D _ A _ C


- Heading: writer’s address and the date.
- Opening: Dear…



- Body of the letter.


- Closing: Your friend/ Regard/ Love.
2.


<i> Now help Lan write a letter to her pen pal </i>
<i>Donna in San Francisco. Use the information </i>
<i>in the box . </i>


Dear Donna,


Thanks for your letter. I’m pleased to hear you had a
happy Mother’s day. I received my second semester
report last month. I got good grades for Geography,
Physics and Math, but my English and History results
were poor. My teacher told me to improve English
and History. I think I’ll have to study harder next
school year.


In a few weeks we’ve going to celebrate the
Mid-Autumn or Festival. That is a moon festival in
Autumn or Fall in Vietnam. I’m going to Ha Long
Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus this afternoon and
I’m going to stay there with them until after the
festival. I’ll send you a post card from there.
Write soon and tell me all your news.
Best,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

<i><b>Period: 31 Monday October 31</b><b>st</b><b><sub> , 2011</sub></b></i>

<b>Unit 5 : STUDY HABITS</b>



<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 6:</b>

<b>Language focus</b>



I, <b>Objectives:</b> By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:


- Use commands, requests and advice in reported speech;
modals and adverbs of manner


II. <b>Langguage contents</b>:


-

Vocab : behave, sore throat, replant, mend,

-

Structure: To ask / tell sb to do sth


III. <b>Teaching aids</b> :


- Picture, book, chalk….
IV. <b>Procedures </b>:<b> </b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


1, <b>Warm up</b> :


-

T repeats how to use the adverbs of manner
and explains how to do exercise


-

Asks Ss to fill in the blank (2’)

-

Corrects mistakes


- Some Ss read the dialogue again


<b>2, Practice</b>



- T asks Ss to translate the title


- T shows the picture and introduces about the
house of Mr Hao


- Asks some questions:
+, Is Mr Hao's house old ?
+, Is the roof/ the door new ?
+, Are the trees beautiful ?


 What should he do ?
- T gives example


- Asks Ss to make sentences using should
- T guides how to do Ex 3


- T gives some examples
- Gives structure


<i><b>Note : How to change pronoun and possessive </b></i>
pronoun


- Work in pairs (2')
- Ss write on the board
- Corrects mistakes
- Translate this title


- Explains the advice in reported speech
- Gives example



- Compare with commands and requests in
reported speech


- Ss work in pairs (2')


- Some Ss write on the board
- Corrects mistakes


1, Complete the dialogue. Use the adverbs of
manner


b, hard d, badly
c, fast e, softly


2, Work with a partner. Look at the picture.Say what
Mr Hao should do


Ex : Mr Hao should repair the roof
- Mr Hao should replant the trees
- mend the door
- cut the grass
- paint the house
3, Work with a partner


Ex:"Can you give Tim this dictionary?”


 Miss Jackson asked me to give you this
dictionary



Indirect: S + ask/ tell + O + to-V …


a, Miss Jackson told me to wait for her outside her
office


b, ... to give you your...


c, ...to help you with your...
d, ….. to meet her next week.


4, Work with a partner. Report Miss Jackson’s
advice


Eg : " Tim should work harder on his Spanish
pronunciation


 Miss Jackson said you should work harder on
your Spanish pronunciation


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

3,<b>Production</b>:<b> </b>


-

Reminds how to change into reported
speech


4,<b>Home work</b> :


- review how to change into reported speech
- guides Ss to do exercise 7 (page 36-SBT)


- Prepare Unit 6



<b> WEEK: 11</b> <i><b>Date of preparation: 25/ 1 0/ 2010</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 31</b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 26 / 10 / 2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 6. THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>
<b>Lesson 1:Getting Started & Listen and read</b>
<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


<b>-</b>

Known about the young Pioneers actions.


<b>-</b>

Practice and talk about the plan of the young Pioneers actions …
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Present simple tense


_ Vocabulary:- enroll, application form, fill out, sign, hobby.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk ,real things, cassette and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up: chatting


T & ss ask and answer some questions


B. New lesson


1.


Presentation


T: from warming up teacher introduces “
getting started” part and explain the way to
practice.


Ss: Listen and try to do in pairs
T: Control and correct mistakes


1. What do you often do in you free time ?
2. Have you taken part in society activities?
3.Have you help elderly people ?


4. What do you do ?
I. Getting started:
_ helping blind people
_ helping elderly


_ helping handicapped children
_ cleaning up the streets


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

2. Practice


T: set situation and give out some new
words.


_ give some guiding questions



_ Practice reading independent and in
pairs


Ss: Listen and do as requested
T: Control and guide to answer
* Check vocabularies by cleaning the
meaning and asking again.


T: ask ss to complete Nga’s details in
group first then present on the board.
Ss: Try to complete


T: Look and correct mistakes


C. Consolidation


- Remark all period and ask the question “
What should we do in young
Pioneers activities?”


- Ss’ answer
D. Homework


_ Learn new words and do exercises.


II. Listen and read
1. New words


- enroll ( translation )



- application form : ( real thing )
- fill out: ( action )


- sign: ( action )


- hobby: ( translation + ex )


Ex: Listening to music is my hobby.
* Some guiding questions:


1. What’s her name?
2. Where is her address?


3. What is her telephone number?
4. What’s her date of birth?
5. What is her hobbies?


2. Complete Nga’s details
Name: Pham Mai Nga


Home address: 5 Tran Phu Street
Phone number: Not available
Date of birth: April 22, 1989
Sex: Female


Interests: drawing, outdoor activities and acting.


<i><b> WEEK: 11</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 27/ 1 0/ 2010</b></i>


<i><b>Period : 32 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 28/ 1 0/ 2010</b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :

<b>-</b>

Practice speaking:


<b>-</b>

Asking for favor/ oferring assistance and responding.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Can/ Could you help me?/ May I help you?
_ Vocabulary: reveiw


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up:


T: Ask ss to read the text and answer some
questions


Ss: Listen and practice
B. New lesson


1.


Presentation



T: Explain the aims of this section and take
some notes


- Practice reading first.


Ss: Listen and copy down . then practice
them.


2. Practice


T: Let ss practice in pairs first and then
present aloud before class.


Ss: Listen and try to do.
T: Listen and correct mistakes.


T: Guide ss to practice first , then ask ss to
practice in pairs.


Ss: Listen and try to practice.
T: Listen and correct mistakes.


1. Speak


* Asking for favors:


+ Can / Could you help me?
+ I need a favor.



* Responding to favors
+ Certainly/ Of course
+ No, problem.


+ I’m sorry. I’m really busy.
* Offering assistance


+ May I help you?
+ Do you need any help?
+ Let me help you?
* Responding assistance
+ Yes / No. Thank you.


+ Yes. That’s very kind of you.
+ No, Thank you. I’m fine.
* Language focus 3


a. Work with a partner
a. buy a ticket for me.


b. Take me with across the road.
c. Help me with this math.
d. Water the flowers


b. Complete the dialogue and practice:
1. Can/ Could I help you?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

C. <b> Consolidation</b>


- Remark all period aloud.


D. Homework


- Practice speaking more at home.
- Do exercises at home.


3. Let me help you.
That’s very kind of you.


<i><b>WEEK: 11</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 29/ 1 0/ 2010</b></i>


<i><b>Period : 33</b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 30/ 1 0/ 2010</b></i>


<b>LISTEN </b>


<b> LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2</b>
<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


- review some grammars and practice more exercises.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Review


<b>-</b>

Present tense with future meaning

<b>-</b>

Gerunds


Modals : may / can / could.
_ Vocabulary:



<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up I. Ask and answer:


* Present tense to talk about future activities / event
a. When do they plant and water the trees along the
streets?


- On Feb 2


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

B. New lesson
1.Presentation
*. Pre-listening


T: Explain thee request of the listen ( fill in
the missing words )


Ss: Listen carefully.
*. While- listening
T: Play the tape 3 times


- ask ss to fill the missing words
- cross checking


Ss: Listen carefully and fill.




*. Post-listening


T: Ask ss write the key on the board
Ss: Try to write


T: Look and correct mistakes again
( Use sub-board )


2. Practice1


T: Let ss practice singing a song
Ss: Try to sing


T: guide the way to do and ask ss to
practice in pairs.


Ss: Listen carefully and practice in pairs
first and then present before class .
T: Listen and correct mistakes again.
. Practice 2


T: First write the structure for ss and then
takes some examples.


Ss: Listen and copy


T: Let ss practice in pairs and then present
before class.



Ss: Listen and do as requested.
T: Control and correct mistakes
*


<b> Further practice</b>


T: Give some situations and ask ss to make
new dialogue.


Ss: Try to do in group, in pairs and present
before class.


T: Control and correct mistakes.
D. Consolidation


- Remark all period aloud.
C. Homework


- Ask ss to do exercises at home again
- Prepare the test.


- In the city center streets.


c. What time do they start and finish work ?
- They start at 7 am and finish at 10


<b>Listen</b>


Children of our land unite


Let’s sing for peace
Let’s sing for right


Let’s sing for the love between north and south,
Oh, children of our land, unite.


Children of the world hold hands.
Let’s show our love from place to place.
Let’s shout out loud,


Let’s make a stand,


Oh, children of the world, hold hands.


( Adapted from “ Children of the World Unite ” –
Words by Margaret; Music and tune by Robin
Cameron)


II. Work with a partner:
1. Talk about hobbies ….
Love


Like + V- ing
Hate


Ex: Ba hates cooking meals but he likes performing
music.


Ex: Lan likes cooking meals and she likes performing
music, too.



Ex: Ba doesn’t like gardening & Lan doesn’t like
gardening , either.………


2. Ask and answer questions with your partner.
_ Do you like washing up ?


+ No, I hate it. What about you ?
+ Yes, I love washing up.……….
* Further practice:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

<i><b>WEEK: 12</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 01/11/2010</b></i>


<i><b>Period : 34 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 02/11/2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 6. THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>
<b>Lesson 4: READ</b>


<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


<b>-</b>

Develop reading skill & find out the necessary information.

<b>-</b>

Practice answering questions to base on the passage.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>
_ Grammar : The simple past.


_ Vocabulary:- encourage, citizenship, fitness, co-education, voluntary, slight, differ.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>



_ Color chalk and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up :
T: Let ss sing a song again before class
independent and in chorus.


B. New lesson
1. Pre-reading


T: Set situation , read aloud and give out some
new words.


- Practice new words in chorus, independent.
Ss: Listen and copy down. Then practice.


<i>3.</i>


<i> While- reading</i>


T: Ask ss to look at missing dates first and then
read the passage in silent and complete .


Ss: Listen and try to do.


T: Ask ss to present before class and correct
mistakes.



Sing a song again


READ


1. New words


- encourage: ( translation )
- citizenship( translation )
- fitness( translation )
- co-education( translation )
- voluntary( translation )
- slight( translation )
- differ. ( example)


Ex: This test differ from that test.
2. Practice reading:


the passage ( 57 )


3. Fill the missing dates
a. 1907


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

<i>4.</i>


<i> Post-reading</i>


T: Let ss read the passage again and answer
questions in group, in pairs.



Ss: Listen and try to do as requested.
Then present before class.


T: Control class, guide ss to do and correct
mistakes.


<i>5.</i>


<i> Further practice</i>


T: Let ss read the passage aloud and ask some
questions.


Ss: Listen and try to do.


C. Consolidation
_ Remark all period loud.


D. Homework


_ Ask ss to learn new words, read passage and
answer the questions again at home.


c. 1910
d. 1994


3. Answer the questions:


a. Scouting began in England in 1907.
b. The meeting between a boy scout and Mr.


William Boyce led to the Scout Association
crossing the Atlantic in 1910.


c. Girls can join in the The Girl Guides Association
and Camp Fire Boys and Girls.


D. The three aims are building character, good
citizenship and personal fitness.


1. Who is Mr. William Boyce ?


2. What did the boy do for William Boyce ?
3. What do you think about activities?
4. D you like joining this activity?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

<i><b>WEEK: 12</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 03/11/2010</b></i>


<i><b>Period : 35 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 04/11/2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 6. THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>
Lesson 5: WRITE


<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


<b>-</b>

Practice writing skill, write the simple sentences.

<b>-</b>

Talk about the intention in the future


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : The simple future.


_ Vocabulary: recycle, resources, position, fund, register.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up


T: Ask some ss to read the text and answer the
questions.


B. New lesson
1. Pre-writing


T: Set situation and give ss some new words.
Then practice them.


Ss : Listen , copy down then practice.


T: Let ss read the notice aloud before class and
ask some questions.(in oral)


Ss: read aloud and try to answer.
2. While-writing



T: Let ss read the letter first and then complete
letter in group.


Ss: Listen and try to do.


T: Let ss to present the letter before class and
write the letter on the sub- board.


T: Read conversation and guide ss to write Hoa’s
letter in group.


Ss: Read completed the letter silent and aloud.
Then practice writing.


3. Post-writing


T: Let ss cross checking first then present on the
board.


Ss: Listen and do as requested.


T: Control and guide ss’ writing then ask ss to


- Read the text and answer some questions.


WRITE
1. New words


- recycle: ( translation )
- resources: ( translation )


- position: ( translation )
- fund: ( translation )
- register: ( translation )
2. Complete the letter:


1. community 6. save
2. recycling 7. raise


3. collect 8 . participating
4. sent 9. plating
5. recycling 10. helping


3. Write Hoa’s letter to her parents telling what she is
going to do:


Dear Mom and Dad


I’m very happy to tell you that I’m going to join
Y&Y Green Group of my school.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

present their writing on the board.
Ss: Listen and try to do.


T: control and correct mistakes again.


C. Consolidation


T: Remark all period and let ss read the letter
aloud.



Ss: Listen carefully and read aloud.
D. Homework


- ask ss to write the the letter for friends at home.


plan. We are going to clean the banks of the lakes on
weekends. We are going to plant trees and flowers in
the school garden and water them every afternoon
after class. We are planting young trees and plants to
sell to other schools.


We hope that we can give more green color to the
city and earn some money for our school Y & Y.
The program is very interesting and useful , isn’t it?
I will tell you more about the group activities later.
Love,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

<i><b>WEEK: 12</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 04/11/2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 36</b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 05/11/2010</b></i>


<b>REVISION</b>


<b>I. Objectives : Students can review knowledge form Unit 1 to Unit 3 </b>
<b>II. Language contents ::</b>


j Grammar : _ used to


_ Report speech.


_ Model verbs: must, have to, ought to


_ Gerunds


k Vocabulary :
<b>IV. Techniques: </b>


<b> revision, practiced speech</b>
<i><b>III. Teaching aids : the exercises</b></i>


<b>V. Procedures : </b>


<b>T’s and SS’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. <b>Warm up : </b>
<i><b>chatting</b></i>


B.


<b> New lesson</b>
1. Presentation:


T & Ss review the structures they have
learned, write on the board.


T: Explain clearly structures and take
example.


Ss: Listen and copy down.


2. Practice :



T: Give some exercises and ask ss to
apply structures and practice them.
Ss: Copy down and practice then present
before class.


<b>I. Used to</b>


1. Actions in the present.


+ S + be/ get + used to + V-ing


Ex: I’m used to getting up early in the morning.
2. Actions in the past.


+ S + used to + V :


Ex: I used to cry when I was young.
* Exercises:


1. Tom is used ( do )… his homework in the evening.
2. He used to ( live )……….in Hue 4 years ago.
3. We used to ( ride )…………. our bike to school.
4. He is used to ( read )………. books in his free time.
5. Are they used to ( stay )……….. late at night.
<b>II. Reported speech:</b>


Ex: Nam asked Ha “ Could you buy me a math exercises book?”
- Nam asked Ha to buy him a math exercise book.


<b>* Exercises: </b>



1. Phuong told Tuan “ Please turn off the radio”


2. Lien asked Huy “ Can you put the books on the shelf”
3. My brother said “You should say nothing about it”
4. Hoa said to Lan “ Please come into my house.”
5. The doctor said “ You should stay in bed a few days”
<b>III. Gerunds:</b>


<i><b>+ S + like, love, hate, dislike, enjoy, prefer, …+ V-ing</b></i>
Ex: We like playing soccer in the afternoon.


<b>* Exercises</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

C.


<b> Consolidation : </b>
T: Remark aloud all period.


D. Homework


T: Ask ss to learn structure by heart and
prepare the test.


3. I’d like ( go )………. to the movies on weekends.
4. She hates ( play)………. badminton.
5. Do you like ( skip )………. at recess.
<b>* Choose the best answer:</b>


1. That is Loan. She.……..my next-door neighbor.


a) used to have b) used to stayc) used to be
2. I know you worked really hard this………...
a) semeters b) semester c) semesret
3. Miss Jackson said you………..…… work harder on your
Spanish pronunciation.


a) must b) may c) should


4. There are also different ways of……….…new words.


a) learn b) learn c) learning


5. I want to………. this parcel to HCM city.


a) send b) sending c) sent


6……….….time do you spend on these subjects: Math,
History, English.


a) How many b) How much c)How often 7.………
subject do you need to improve?


a) Which b) What time c) Where


8. Every learner ……….……. words in different
ways.


a) learn b) learning c) learns


<i><b>WEEK: 13</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 08/11/2010</b></i>



<i><b>Period : 37</b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 09/11/2010</b></i>


<b>45 minutes Test</b>
<b>I/ </b>


<b> Objectives : </b>


To check the SS’ knowledge after unit 4,5,6
<b>II/ Language contents: </b>


All the grammar and vocabulary in unit 4,5,6
<b> </b>


CHỦ ĐỀ NHẬN BIẾT THÔNG HIỂU VẬN DỤNG TỔNG


TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL


<b>I/Language focus:</b>


2 4 2 8


<b>II/ Reading:</b> <sub> </sub>


2 2 <sub> 0</sub> 4


<b>III/Writing:</b>


<b> </b> 0





3 1



4
<b>IV/Listening:</b>






2




2 0



4
<b>Tổng</b>





6





11 3


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

<b> . Rewrite the sentences using the following sets of words and phrases. You can make all the </b>
<i><b>necessary changes and additions.</b></i>


<b>1.</b> Nga / like / learn / English


<i>2.</i> Do / you / need / help /? - Certainly. What / I / do / you?
2. Mary said to John,” Can you carry my suitcase , please?”




Mary asked John ………
3. Last week / she / buy / English-Vietnamese dictionary


<b>II.</b> <b>LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>


<b>a.</b> <b>Put the suitable form of the words ( base the on given words)</b>
1. Tim should spend more time on English PRONOUN ..……...
2. Nga is good at English . She speaks English very GOOD...


3. This MEET...led to Scouts Association crossing the Atlantic in 1910
4 . His test was very poor. He only got... three marks




b. Put the suitable preposition in each blank key
1. I have English (1)…….. Tuesday and Friday ->...
2. My brother and I have to finish this work...8.00 and 9.00 ->...
3. The weather is warm...the Spring -> ...


4. What do you often do ...shool ? ->...


III LISTEN :


<b>Listen to the conversation then put the missing information to complete the setences</b>
1/ Nga was born on……….22, 1989


2/ She lives at 5 Tran Phu Street and doesn’t have a……….at home


3/ Nga likes drawing and outdoor activities. And she ………., too
4/ The secretary asked Nga to take the form to her ………...to sign it


<b>IV.</b> <b>READING</b>


<b> Read the passage then answer the questions</b>


<i><b>How Nam has improved his English</b></i>


<i><b>In the first year of lower secondary school, I had some difficulties in learning English.</b></i>
<i><b>My English pronunciation was really bad and my English grammar was worse. I did</b></i>
<i><b>not know how to improve them. I didn’t want my father and mother to know about this.</b></i>
<i><b>One afternoon after the lesson, my teacher of English told me to wait for her outside</b></i>
<i><b>the classroom. She took me to the school library and showed me cassettes of</b></i>


<i><b>pronunciation drills kept in a glass bookcase. She also told me how to use an </b></i>
<i><b>English-English dictionary to improve my English-English grammar. “Now I think you know what you</b></i>
<i><b>should do”, said she. I made much progress and only one year later, I won the first</b></i>
<i><b>prize in the English Speaking Contest held for secondary school students in my</b></i>
<i><b>hometown.</b></i>



<b>1. What difficulties did Nam have in learning English in the first year?</b>
<i> </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

<i><b>WEEK: 13</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 10/11/2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 38</b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 11/11/2010</b></i>


<i><b>Correct test</b></i>
<i><b>I. WRITING</b></i>


<b>. Rewrite the sentences using the following sets of words and phrases. You can make all the necessary</b>
<i><b>changes and additions.</b></i>


1. Nga / like / learn / English
Nga likes learning English


2. Do / you / need / help /? - Certainly. What / I / do / you?
Do you need any help? - Certainly . What can I do for you?
3. Last week / she / buy / English-Vietnamese dictionary


Last week she bought English-Vietnamese dictionary
4. . Mary said to John,” Can you carry my suitcase , please?”
Mary asked John to carry her suicase


<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>


<i><b>b.</b></i> <i><b>Put the suitable form of the words ( base the on given words)</b></i>
1. Tim should spend more time on English PRONOUN pronunciation
2. Nga is good at English . She speaks English very GOOD...well.


3. This MEET..meeting...led to Scouts Association crossing the Atlantic in 1910




4 . His test was very poor. He only got..got. three marks
<b>II LISTEN :</b>


<i>Listen to the conversation then put the missing information to complete the setences</i>
1/ Nga was born on…April.22, 1989


2/ She lives at 5 Tran Phu Street and doesn’t have a…phone .at home


3/ Nga likes drawing and outdoor activities. And she ……likes acting……., too
4/ The secretary asked Nga to take the form to her …teacher…...to sign it


b. Put the suitable preposition in each blank key
1. I have English (1)…on….. Tuesday and Friday ->....on...
2. My brother and I have to finish this work...8.00 and 9.00 -....between....
3. The weather is warm...the Spring -> ...in...
4. What do you often do ...shool ? ->...after...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

<b> Read the passage then answer the questions</b>


<i>How Nam has improved his English</i>


<i>In the first year of lower secondary school, I had some difficulties in learning English.</i>
<i>My English pronunciation was really bad and my English grammar was worse. I did</i>
<i>not know how to improve them. I didn’t want my father and mother to know about this.</i>
<i>One afternoon after the lesson, my teacher of English told me to wait for her outside</i>
<i>the classroom. She took me to the school library and showed me cassettes of</i>


<i>pronunciation drills kept in a glass bookcase. She also told me how to use an </i>


<i>English-English dictionary to improve my English-English grammar. “Now I think you know what you</i>
<i>should do”, said she. I made much progress and only one year later, I won the first</i>
<i>prize in the English Speaking Contest held for secondary school students in my</i>
<i>hometown.</i>


<b>1. What difficulties did Nam have in learning English in the first year?</b>


<b>=>In the first year his English pronunciation was really bad and his English grammar was worse</b>
<i> </i>


<b>1. Who wanted to meet him one afternoon after the lesson?</b>


<i> His English Teacher wanted to meet him one afternoon after the lesson</i>
<b>3. Where did Nam and his teacher go after that?</b>


<i> =>. Nam and his teacher went to the library after that.</i>


<b>4. What did he win in the English Speaking Contest one year later?</b>
<i> =>.He won the first prize in the English Speaking Contest one year later..</i>
<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b>WEEK: 13</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 12/11/2010</b></i>


<i><b>Period : 39</b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 13/11/2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>
Lesson 1: Getting Started & Listen and read
<b>I. Objectives :</b>



_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


- know the names of places in a neighborhood.
- practice reading and understanding the dialogue
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Present perfect tense with Since & For
_ Vocabulary:- area, close by, serve, pancake, delicious.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk ,real things, cassette and sub-board
<b>IV.</b> <b>Procedures :</b>


<b>V.</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warming up :</b>
Gap- fill


T: Ask ss to fill in some simply sentences
Ss: Look and try to fill


1. Do you often go to the ………. to buy some
vegetables.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

T: Remark and give mark


B. New lesson
1. Presentation



T: from warming up, teacher lets ss to match
the names of places and then practice “ ask
and answer”


Ss: Listen , look and practice in pairs
T: Control and guide ss to practice.


2. Practice


T: Set situation and give out some new words,
and structure, then practice them


Ss: Listen ,copy and practice


T: First ask ss to practice reading dialogue in
pairs.


Ss: practice dialogue in pairs


T: Listen and correct pronunciation.


Ss: Look and complete.


T: Listen and correct then let ss complete
sentences in group.


Ss: Listen and do as requested.
T: Control, and correct mistakes.



C. Consolidation


- Remark all period and practice part 1 again.
- Practice exercise ( LF3) using the present
perfect tense.


Ss: Try to do and teacher correct again.
D. Homework


_ Ask ss to learn new words ands structure.
_ Prepare next period


3. Nam often goes to ……… in the swimming
pool in the summer.


4. My mother often buy oil, onion, pepper, at
the………..


5. My family often buy tablets at the………
<b>* Getting stared and Listen & read</b>


<b>I. Getting started</b>
a. Grocery store
Ex:


A: What is this ?
B: A grocery


A: Is there a grocery in your neighborhood/ near your
house?



b. stadium
c. wet market
d. drug store
e. hairdressers’
f. swimming pool
II. Listen and read
1. New words
- area: ( translation)
- close by = nearly
- serve: ( explanation)
- pancake: ( translation)
- delicious: ( translation)
2. Structure


Present perfect tense
* S + Have / Has + V3/ed
S + Have / Has ( not )+ V3/ed
Have / Has + S + V3/ed
+ since : mốc thời gian
+ for : khoảng thời gian


Ex:- I have learned English for 3 years.
- We have learned English since 2004
3. Complete the sentences….


a. Na is new to the neighborhood.
b. She and her family arrived last week.
c. Na’s mother is very tired.



d. There is restaurant in the area.
e. The restaurant serve food from Hue.
f. Nam thinks the pancakes are tasty.


LF 3. Complete the sentences. Use the present perfect form
of the verbs in the brackets.


a. I have lived here since last week.


b. We haven’t eaten in that restaurant for two years.
c. I haven’t seen her yesterday.


d. They have attended Quang Trung School since last year.
e. My dad has worked his company for 20 years.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<i><b>WEEK: 14</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 15/11/2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 40</b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 16/11/2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>


Lesson 2: SPEAK and LANGUAGE FOCUS 1, 4
<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can


<b>-</b>

make a new dialogue to base on the provided dialogues.

<b>-</b>

Know the way to send a letter, a parcel….


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



_ Grammar : Present simple tense


_ Vocabulary:- parcel, airmail, surface mail,
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk and sub-board
<b>IV.. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. <b>Warming up :</b>
Brainstorming


_ Let ss write some places they’ve learned


B. New lesson
1. Presentation


T: Set situation and give ss some new words. Then
practice them.


Ss: Listen, copy and practice.


T: Let ss to role play and read the dialogue in pairs.
Ss: Practice


2. Practice


T: Guide ss to make similar dialogues


in pairs first then present before class.
Ss: Do as requested


T: Control and guide ss to do.


Market stadium


Speak


1. New words
- parcel
- airmail
- surface mail
2. Practice dialogue:
( Page 64-65 )


3. Make similar dialogues:


* letter/ Kon Tom/ surface mail/ 20kg.


Mr. Hai: Hello. I’d like to send this letter to Kon Tom,
please?


Clerk: All right. How would you like to send?
Mr. Hai: Pardon?


Clerk: Would you like to send it airmail or surface
mail?


Mr. Hai: I’m not sure. How much is airmail ?



Clerk : I’ll have to weigh it first. Twenty grams. That’ll
Some


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

Langua focus 1


Match aech verb to it past participle
Work individual


4. Complete the conversation. Use the correct form of
the verb


Work in pairs


<b>C.Consolidation</b>


T: Remark all period and ask ss to make a new
dialogue that teacher given. ( in oral )


Ss: Listen and try to do
D.


<b> Homework :</b>


_ Ask ss to make similar dialogue at home as
possible.


be 1,700dong.


Mr. Hai: Oh! That’s very expensive.



Clerk: Surface mail is much cheaper. It’s only 800
dong.


Mr. Hai: It’s better. I’ll send it surface mail.
Clerk: All right.


 postcard/ Ho Chi Minh city / airmail/ 15g


Do the same with the one


1. Match each verb to its past participle.
Be _ been See – seen
Go – gone Write – written
Eat – eaten Do – done


Live – lived Worked – worked
Attend – attended Collect – collected
4. Complete the conversation. Use the correct form of
the verbs in the box.


1. have been 5.want
2. hope 6. looks


3. have you been 7. have you ever seen
4. is 8. have seen


<i><b>WEEK: 14</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 17/11/2010</b></i>


<i><b>Period : 41</b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 18/11/2010</b></i>




<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>


Lesson 2: LISTEN and LANGUAGE FOCUS 2,3,5
<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


- Listen coversation put the suitable phrase from the box and correct the boxes
- review some grammars and practice more exercises.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>
_ Grammar : Review


- Present perfect tense with since and for


- Comparison: like ( not) as….as , the same……..as
Modals : may / can / could.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ text book , pictures and cssette .
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warming up</b>


T: Ask ss to write the structure about the present


perfect.


Ss: Try to write
T: remark .


<b>B. New lesson</b>
*. Pre-listening


T: Set situation and ask ss to look at the
advertisement clearly and listen to the tape in
order to fill the blank.


Ss: Look and listen carefully.
*. While-listening


T: Play the tape for about 3 times


Ss: Listen and fill then cross checking first and
then present before class.


T: Listen and correct and guide ss to do part 2
then play the tape.


Ss: Listen carefully and do in group first.
*. Post-listening


T: Let ss cross checking first and then ask ss to
present before class.


Ss: Listen and do as directed



T: Look and correct ( Use sub-board) and let ss
to compare then correct themselves.


Presentation


T: Guide ss to do this part and ask ss to match.
Ss: do


T: correct them again and re speak the way to use
“since , for” then ask ss to fill quickly.


Ss: Listen and fill.
T: Correct again
<i><b> Practice:</b></i>


T: Explain the tilte and ask ss to practice
exercises in group , in pairs.


Ss: Listen and do the task.
T: Control and correct mistakes.
T: Correct in oral before class.


Ss: Listen and copy down in their books.
T: Explain clearly each part .


Ss: Listen and take notes


T: Write some comparison structures on the board
and explain first .



_ Then let ss to look at each picture and complete
sentences.


Structure:


(+) S + Have / Has + V3/ed
( - ) S + Have / has + V3/ ed
( ? ) Have / Has + S + V3ed ?
Listen


A . Fill in the blank……
1. The Newcomer
2. Town Ground


3. English Speaking Contest
4. Culture House


<b>B.</b> Correct box for True, False or No information :
Tape transcript:


On the text book


Keys:


a. true d. True
b. False e. True


c. False f. No information



2. Complete the expressions: Use since or for
* For a period of time


Ex: for five years
* Since a point of time
Ex: since Tuesday


<b>-</b>

for five minutes

<b>-</b>

since January

<b>-</b>

since 1990

<b>-</b>

since the summer

<b>-</b>

for three hours

<b>-</b>

for 10 weeks

<b>-</b>

since Friday

<b>-</b>

for 20 years
* Language focus 5:
<b>Structures</b>


( not ) as… as


( not ) the same as………
Different from


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

Ss: Listen and complete then read aloud before
class.


T: Listen and correct mistakes ( using sub-board)
<b>C..Consolidation</b>


_ Remark all period especially in the test.


<b>D. Homework</b>


_ Ask ss to learn and do homework at


home. c. different from; not as / so cheap as.<sub>d. the same</sub>
e. as cheap / expensive as


f. different from
g. as long as
h. not as modern as
i. not as / so cheap as


<i><b>WEEK: 14</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 18/11/2010</b></i>


<i><b> Period: 42 Date of teaching: 19/11/2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>
Lesson 3: READ


<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


- Practice reading comprehension skill.


<b>-</b>

Answer questions base on the passage, True – False
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Present perfect tense.



_ Vocabulary:- mall, humid, goods, resident, comfort, situation, discount.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warming up : </b>
chatting


T & Ss ask and answer some questions
<b>B. New lesson</b>


<i>1. Pre-reading</i>


T: Set situation and read passage aloud.
- Give out some new words and practice them.
Ss: Listen and copy.


1. Have you gone to shop?
2. How do you feel?


3. Do you like to buy some goods in shop or in the market?
<b>Read</b>


1. New words
- mall: ( translation )
- humid = wet



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<i>2. while-reading</i>


T: Let ss read passage in silence and aloud to
answer True or False


- Correct the False sentences


_ Ss: Listen and do. Then present before class
T: Listen and correct their mistakes


<i>3. Post-reading</i>


T: Let ss read passage again and answer the
questions .( in pairs)


Ss: Do as directed then present before class.
T: Control and correct mistakes again. ( use
sub-board)


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


_ Remark all period and ask some question in
oral,


<b>D. Homework</b>
_ learn new words by heart
_ Do exercises at home.


2. Practice reading


Page ( 67 )


3. True or False. Then correct the false sentences.
a. False: The mall is open daily ( 7 days a week)
b. False: There are 50 stores in the mall.


c. False: Not everyone is pleased about the new mall.
d. True


e. True
4. Answer:


a. It is very different from the present shopping area. All
the shops are under one roof. That will be very convenient,
specially during the hot and humid summer months.
Customers will shop in comfort and won’t notice the
weather.


b. In the shopping mall, there are 50 air-conditioned
specially stores, 4 movie theater and 10 restaurants; there is
also a children’s play area


c. They drink the new shopping mall will take their
business.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<i><b>WEEK: 14</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 22/11/2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 43</b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 23/11/2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>


Lesson 4 :WRITE


<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :

<b>-</b>

Practice writing skill


<b>-</b>

Write the notice basing on the provided notice given.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Present simple tense and future tense.
_


<b>Vocabulary:-III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up: Chatting


T: Ask ss to read the passage in reading
part and answer some questions


Ss: Try to as requested and answer
T: Remark


B. New lesson
1. Pre-writing



T: Set situation and let ss read the
community notice clearly.


Ss: Listen and do as directed.
2. While-writing


T: Explain and guide ss to do first then let
ss write a notice about the English


Speaking Club contest.
Ss: Listen and try to write.
_ Some ss write on the board.
_ Some ss read aloud before class
T: Control and correct mistakes again.
3. Post-writing


T: Let ss write some notices free in group,
individual.


Ss: Listen and try to write then present
before class .


T: Control and correct their mistakes.


1. Have you gone to shop?
2. How do you feel?


3. Do you like to buy some goods in shop or in the
market?



4. What do you think about shop and market?
<b>Write</b>


1. Read the community notice:
( page 68)


2. Write a notice about the English Speaking contest :
<b>The school English Speaking Club</b>


<b>Contest on Speaking Skill</b>
- Date: 15


- Time: 7:30p.m to 10


- Place: Hall 204. Building G


- For further information, please contact Tran Thi
Thu Hang, Class 8H.


3. Write one or two notices about your class meeting
and/ or your Sports club meeting.


a. To make a good preparation for the teacher’s Day
this yea, our class is going to hold a meeting, which is
at our classroom after class net Saturday.


Please all members of our class should be present.
Perfect.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

C. Consolidation


_ Remark all period aloud. And call some
ss to read the writing aloud.


D. Homework


_ Learn structures by heart
_ Write some notices again
_ Do exercises at home


the Teacher’s Day. The meeting will be at Hall 211,
building C at 10 am, on November 10.


All the students in change of class sports should be
present.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

<i><b>WEEK: 15</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 24/ 11 / 2010</b></i>


<i><b>Period : 44 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 25/ 12 /2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>
Lesson1: Getting Started & Listen and read
<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


- know the different between the country life and city life.
- practice reading and understanding the dialogue .



- answer the questions about the content of the dialogue.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Answer the questions : Wh - question


_ Vocabulary:- peaceful, relative, permanently, remote area, medical facility, accessible.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , cassette and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warming up:</b>


T: Ask ss some sentences about life in the
city, life in the country.


Ss: Listen and try to answer.
<b>B. New lesson</b>
<i>1. Presentation</i>


T: Have ss to compare some activities in
the city and in the countryside.


Ss: Try to do


T: Control and correct mistakes


_ Set situation the text and give out some


new words.


_ Practice them.


Ss: Listen , copy down and then practice in
chorus and in pairs.


<i>2. Practice</i>


T: Read the dialogue aloud and ask ss to
practice reading in pairs.


Ss: Listen and read aloud.


T: Control and correct pronunciation


T: Have ss read the dialogue again and
answer the questions in pairs.


Ss: Listen and do the task then present


1. Do you live in a city ?


2. What do you think about life in the city?
3. Do you like living in the city? Why ?


4. Do you like living in the countryside ? Why?
Can you tell some reasons ?


I.



Getting started


<b>City Country</b>


- noisy - beautiful views
- tall building - fresh air


- kind of goods - friendly
- entertainments - fresh foods
- traffic-jam - quiet
II. Listen and Read


1. New words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

before class.


T: Listen and correct mistakes.


<b>C. Consolidation</b>
T: Remark all period and ask ss some
questions


Ss: Try to answer and correct mistakes.
<b>D. Homework</b>


_ Ask ss to learn new words
_ Do exercises at home.


2. Practice the dialogue with a partner.


Page ( 72-73 )


3. Answer the questions:


a. Na has been to the countryside.


b. She was there for the weekend/ one day.
c. The countryside is peaceful, quiet and there is
nothing to do.


d. ( Possible answer) There are no libraries, no
movies, no supermarket,…………..


e. Many remote areas are getting electricity. People
con now have things like refrigerators and T.V and
medical facilities are more accessible.


f. ( Ss’ answer )


1. Do you live in a city ?


2. What do you think about life in the city?
3. Do you like living in the city? Why ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

<i><b>WEEK: 15</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 25/ 11 / 2010</b></i>


<i><b>Period : 45 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 26/ 12 /2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>
Lesson2: SPEAK + LANGUAGE FOCUS 3,4,5


<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


<b>-</b>

talk about the changes of the town.


<b>-</b>

understand the dialogue in order to complete the dialogue clearly.

<b>-</b>

Complete dialogue


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : To be + V-ing ( Become – Get )
_ Vocabulary:


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , cassette and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warming up:</b>
Chatting


T: Ask ss to answer some questions about
the different of the life in the city and the
life in the countryside.


Ss: Try to answer.



<b>B. New lesson</b>
* Action 1:


<i>1. Pre-speaking</i>


T: Set situation and guide ss some words
guiding first.


Ss: Listen carefully.
2. While-speaking


T: ask ss to base on the words guiding to
make some sentences


Ss: Try to make sentences in pairs.
T: Control and guide ss to do
<i>3. Post- speaking</i>


T: Have ss present completing before
class.


Ss: Do the task


T: Listen and correct mistakes.


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


1. Do you live in a city ?


2. What do you think about life in the city?


3. Do you like living in the city? Why ?


4. Do you like living in the countryside ? Why?
* Can you tell some reasons ?


<b> </b> <b> </b>


SPEAK


a. Some words guiding:
_ Traffic _ Busy
_ Sky _ Cloudy
_ Houses _ High
_ City _ Beautiful
_ Trees _ Green trees
b. Making sentences:


- The traffic is getting busier.


- There are more tall buildings and houses.
- The houses are getting more modern.
- The town is becoming more beautiful.
- There are more green trees.


- The streets are becoming cleaner/ larger/ noisier.
………..


c. Working with a partner


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

_ Language focus 3,4,5



* Call ss to rewrite the structure on the
board


- Explain and ask ss to practice exercises in
group


Ss: try to do and write on the board
T: Control and correct again


T: re-speak the way to use comparison and
superlative in oral


And then have ss practice exercises in
group.


Ss: Listen and do( May be, The sentences
depend on Ss’ ideas)


T: Control and correct mistakes again


<b>D. Homework</b>


_ Ask ss to make more sentences at home
and do exercises at home.


* S + be + becoming/ getting


a. The boys are getting taller.
b. The old men are getting weak.



c. We should go home. It is getting dark.
d. The weather is becoming cold.


e. The students are getting better.
f. The schoolyard is becoming cleaner.


4. Make comparisons between the city and the country
about these things.


a. The life in the city is busier and more expensive than
the life in the country.


b. The food in the country is fresher and cheaper
c. The traffic and transport in the city are much better
than that in the city.


d. But the air in the country is fresher.
…………


5. Compare the house, the villa and the apartment.
- The house is more expensive than the apartment.
- The villa is the most expensive.


- The house is smaller than the villa.
- The apartment is the smallest.
...


<i><b>WEEK: 16</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 29 / 11 / 2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 46 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 30 / 11 / 2010</b></i>



<b>Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>
Lesson 3: LISTEN & LANGUAGE FOCUS 1, 2
<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


- review some grammars and practice more exercises.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


- Grammar : Review


<b>-</b>

Present progressive tense : - to talk about the future


- to show changes with get and become

<b>-</b>

Comparative and superlative adjectives


- Vocabulary:
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk and sub-board
<b>IV.Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up:
chatting


T Ask ss some questions



1. What are you doing ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

Ss: try to answer
B. New lesson
*Action 2:
1. Pre- Listening


T: set situation and guide ss to do this part then
listen to the conversation once.


Ss: Listen carefully.
2. While-listening


T: play the tape for 3 times and have ss complete
each sentence.


Ss: Listen and try to do.


T: Have ss cross checking first then present aloud
before class.


Ss: do as directed.
3. Post-listening


T: Control whole class and play the tape and
check the correcting again .


Ss: Look, listen and correct mistakes.
Presentation



T: set situation and guide ss to do this part
- write structure on the board , then ask ss to
complete the dialogue.


Ss: practice in pairs and then present before class.
T: Listen and correct them again


2. Practice<b> : </b>


T: Read dialogues and explain clearly the way to
practice .


Ss: Listen and try to do in pairs first and then
present before class ( make similar dialogues)
T: Control whole class and correct mistakes.


D. Consolidation


_ Remark all period aloud.
<b>B. Homework</b>


_ Ask ss to learn structures clearly
_ Do exercises again at home.


3. Is it difficult ?


* Tape transcription and keys anwer.
Lan: Hello


Aunt Hang: Hello. Is that Lan ?


Lan: Yes. Who is this ?


Aunt Hang: It’s Aunt Hang. How are you?
Lan: I’m fine. Where are you phoning from?


Aunt Hang: Hue. I’m calling to tell you Uncle Chi and I
are coming to visit you next week.


Lan: Great! When are you arriving?


Aunt Hang: On Thursday. We’re arriving in Ha Noi in
the late afternoon.


Lan: Ok. Do you want to speak to my mom?
Aunt Hang: Yes, please.


Lan: Hold on a moment and I’ll get her.
<b>* Language focus </b>


1. Complete the dialogues. Use the verbs in the present
<i>progressive tense . </i>


S + Tobe + V-ing


a. Nam: What are you doing tonight ?
Bao : I’m playing table tennis.


Do the same with the rest
2.



Read the dialogue. Make similar dialogues
<b>a. Mrs Vui : Good morning . I’d like to know the </b>
information about the boat leaving for Quy Nhon.
Clerk: Is that the “ Good Fortune”?


Mrs Vui : That right .It is leaving at 11.30?
Clerk: I’m sorry, sir. It’s been delayed.
Mrs Vui: Oh, no


Clerk: Now. It’s leaving at 13.55
Mrs Vui: Thank you.


Clerk : You’re welcome.


<b>b. Ms Helen: Hello. Is the boat to HCM City leaving at </b>
eleven fifty-five.


Clerk: Is that the “ Golden Trail”?
Ms Helen: That’s right.


Clerk: I’m very sorry, Ma’am, but it’s been delayed.
Ms Helen: Oh, no


Clerk: Now, It’s leaving at sixteen- twenty.
Ms Helen: Thanks a lot.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

<i><b>WEEK: 16</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 1 / 12 / 2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 47 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 2 / 12 / 2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>


Lesson 4: READ


<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


<b>-</b>

read and complete the summary .


<b>-</b>

understand the passage and do exercises .
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar :


simple present tense.
_ Vocabulary:


rural, plentiful, typhoon, drought,
strain, struggle, tragedy, urban, migrant.
<b>III.Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , pictures and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. <b>warming up : </b>
Chatting


T: Ask ss to talk about the changes in their
hometown. (in oral or writing on the board.


)


Ss: try to do


B. New lesson<b> : </b>
1.


<b> Presentation : </b>


T: Set situation and read the text aloud.
- give the meaning some new words in
many ways then practice them.


Ss: Listen and copy down then practice


2. Practice


T: Have ss practice reading the text and
then complete the summary


Ss: Listen and do the task and present
before class.


T: Control class and correct mistakes.


Read


1. New words
- rural :# urban



- plentiful = many = much
- typhoon :(picture )


- drought: ( translation )
- strain :( translation + ex )
- struggle: (translation )
- tragedy : (translation)
- migrant: (ex)


Ex: people lived Qui Nhon and now they move to
Daklak to live .They are migrants


2. Complete the summary:


People from the countryside are leaving their
<b>traditional way of life to go and live in the city . </b>
Farming can sometimes be a a difficult life and these
people from rural areas feel the city offers more


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

3. Further practice


T : Have ss to read the text again and find
the words in the passage.


Ss: Listen and do the task and then present
before class


T: Control and correct mistakes again.
* Use sub-board



C. Consolidation


_ Remark all period and read the new
words slowly again.


D. Homework
_ Ask ss to learn new words and do
exercises at home.


create overcrowding. There may not be enough schools,
<b>hospitals, while water and electricity supplies may not </b>
be adequate. This is a problem facing governments
around the world.


3. Find the word in the passage that means<i> : </i>
a. of the countryside : rural


b. as many as needed : plentiful
c. become greater or larger : increase
d. a great pressure : strain
e. a terrible event : tragedy
f. of the city or city life : urban


<i><b>WEEK: 16</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 2 / 12 / 2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 48 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 3 / 12 / 2010</b></i>


<b>Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>
Lesson 5: WRITE


<b>I. Objectives :</b>



_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


<b>-</b>

Write the letter to their friends about the city and the countryside.

<b>-</b>

Practice writing skill


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : simple present tense.
_ Vocabulary:


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , flash card and sub-board
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. <b>Warming up :</b>
Chatting


T: Ask ss some questions
Ss: Listen and try to answer


1 Have you ever written a letter to friends?


2. Do you often write about the different from the city
and the country ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

B. New lesson


1.


<b> Presentation</b>


T: Explain the way to do this part and ask ss
to correct order the informal letter in pairs
then write on the board.


Ss: Listen and try to order.


T: control and correct again ( use sub-board)


2. <b> Practice</b>


T: Guide ss to write the completing letter to
base on the question given.


Ss: Listen carefully and try to write a whole
letter.


- ( call some ss to write some parts of the
letter on the board.)


T: control and correct mistakes again.


3. Further practice


T: Have some ss to read aloud the
completing letter.



Ss: Listen and do the task.
T: Correct pronunciation


C. Consolidation


_ Remark all period and especially ordering
a letter in part 1


_ Try to write one another letter.
D. Homework


- Learn and write the completing letter at
home.


<b>Write</b>


1. Put the outline for an informal letter in the correct
<i>order . </i>


* Heading


+ Writer’s address
+ Date


+ Dear


<b>-</b>

Opening

<b>-</b>

Body of letter

<b>-</b>

Closing



2. Write a letter to a friend about your neighborhood.
<i>These questions may help you.</i>


( Address:……….. Street )
( Date :………)


Dear……….,


I live in (…………) , a small/ large ( town/ village)
Outside /near (………). My family has small house
with ( 4, 6,…….., lots of ) rooms. My


( sister / brother ) and I share one bedroom. It’s lots of
fun. Outside my window is a small park/ yard with trees,
flowers . We don’t live far from my school, so I can walk
there.


In my neighborhood there is a swimming-pool and a
beautiful park. On the weekend I can go swimming or
(……..) with my family/ friends. But the thing I like best
in my neirborhood is the library near my school. There I
cannot only study, read books, but also watch videos and
learn how to use the computer.


Do you have a library like that in your neirborhood ? Is
there anything interesting where you live ? Write to me.
I’d like to say goodbye now. I’m looking forwards to
hearing from you soon.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<i><b>WEEK: 17</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 6 / 12 / 2010</b></i>


<i><b>Period : 49 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 7 / 12 / 2010</b></i>
<b> CONSOLIDATION </b>


<b> Aims: At the end of these revision lessons, students </b>


can review and remember all the knowledge they have learned.
- Practice exercises .


<b>I. THEORY</b>


<i><b>1. Present Simple tense.( Thì hiện tại đơn)</b></i>


- Form: + S + V/Vs / es + ……… Ex -The earth goes around the sun.
- S + don’t/doesn’t + V+ ………….. -We don’t have classes on Sunday.
? Do/Does + S + V + ……….? - Does Lan speak French?


<i><b>2. Past Simple Tense (Thì quá khứ đơn)</b></i>


- Form: (+) S + V-ed(regular) / V2 ( column irregular) + ………… Ex : - He arrived here yesterday.
(-) S + didn’t + V + ………. - She didn’t go to school yesterday.
(?) Did + S + V + ……… ? - Did you clean this table?


<i><b>3. Future simple Tense (Thì tương lai đơn)</b></i>


- Form : + S + will / shall + V + …………Ex:- He will finish his homework tomorrow .
- S+ won’t / shan’t + V + ……….. - Lan won’t go to the zoo next week.
? Will / Shall + S + V + ………. ?- Will you do this exercise ?


4. Near Future: Be going to (Thì tương lai gần)
- Form : S + is / am/ are + going to + Vinf



Ex : There is a good film on TV tonight. I’m going to stay home to watch TV
<i><b>5. Present progressive Tense (Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)</b></i>


-Form : + S + is / am/ are + V-ing + ……… Ex : - I’m learning English now.
- S + is / am/ are + not + V-ing + …… - He isn’t learning English now.
? Is / Am / Are + S + V-ing + ………? - Is he reading books now?


- Note: Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn thông thường dùng với các trạng từ chỉ thời gian : now, right now,at present , at
the moment


* Talk about the future: <b>S + be + V-ing </b>


Ex: What are you going to do tonight? – We’re playing table tennis.


* To show changes with get and become.: S + be + getting / becoming + adj.
Ex:- The students are getting better.


- The weather is becoming cold.
<i><b>II. EXERCISES:</b></i>


I. Correct verbs in the brackets:


1. Look ! The teacher ( come )... here.
2. We often ( go )... to English club after school.
3. Mai ( learn )... to play the piano in her free time.
4. They ( have )... a meeting tonight.


5. Lan and Hoa ( read )... in the library at the moment .



6. What ... you ( do )... now? I ( grow )... some flowers.
7. My father ( travel )... to Nha Trang next week.


8. Next year, my sister ( be )... a teacher.
9. She ( meet )... her old friends tonight.
10. You ( have )... a lot of friends soon.
II. Choose the suitable words or phrases:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

a. does mean this word b. have this word mean
c. means this word d. does this word mean
2. John ...tennis once or twice a week.


a. usually play b. is usually playing c. usually plays d. have usually played.
3. Nurses ... after patients in hospitals.


a. are looking b. look c. looks d. is looking


4. I usually ... away at weekends.


a. have gone b. goes c. am going d. go


5. The earth ...round the sun.


a. go b. has gone c. went d. goes


6. I come from Canada. Where ...you...from?


a. do...comeb. did ... come c. are ...coming d, have ...come
7. I ... at 8 o’clock every morning.



a. was getting up b. got up c. is getting up d. get up
8. ... you go to dentist ?


a. How often are b. How often do c. How often does d. How are
9. Lan ...tea very often.


a. doesn’t drink b. don’t drink c. didn’t drink d. hasn’t drunken
9. The sun ... in the East.


a. is rising b. rose c. has risen d. rises


10. It ‘s a nice day. I ... we go out for a walk.


a. suggested b. suggest c. is suggesting d. are suggesting
11. The swimming pool ... at 9 o’clock and ... at 18.30 everyday.


a. opens / closes b. opens / closed c. opened / closed d. opened / closes
12. Bad driving often ... many accidents.


a. caused b. caused c. causes d. has caused


13. The Olympic Games ... every four years.


a. take place b. takes place c. took place d. is taking place


<i><b>WEEK: 17</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 8 / 12 / 2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 50 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 9 / 12 / 2010</b></i>
<b> CONSOLIDATION</b>


<b>A. THEORY</b>



<b>1 . The present perfect tense.</b>


<b> - Form : (+) S + have / has + V3/ ed</b>
<b> (- ) S + have / has not + V3/ ed</b>
<b> (? ) S + have / has + V3/ ed ?</b>


<b> - Ex: We have learned English for three years.</b>
<b> * Note: Since / for</b>


<b>2. Gerunds: </b>


S + like, dislike, love , hate , stop , enjoy, ... + V-ing
<b> S + V + Prep + V-ing</b>


<b> Ex: I loving listening to music in my free time.</b>
I am interested in reading books..


<i><b>3. Preposition: </b></i>


<b>* Prepositions of time : at, in ,on, from . . . to, for, by</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<b>- IN : </b>+ Tháng năm cụ thể Ex : I was born 1994


+ the morning/afternoon / evening Ex : We have class in the morning.
<b>- ON: + Ngày trong tuần </b> Ex : We have class on Monday.
+ Ngày tháng năm Ex: I was born on April 6, 2006
<b>- FROM + Mốc thời gian + TO + Mốc thời gian</b>


Ex: We have class from 7.00 to 10.15



- FOR : + Khoảng thời gian : Nói về một cái gì diễn ra bao lâu rồi


Ex : We watched TV for 2 hours last night.
<b>- BY : + Mốc thời gian</b> Ex: Can you finish the work by five o’clock.


<b>- ON : </b>


Ex: There is a picture on the wall.
Ex: I live on Nguyen Van Cu Street.


Ex : We will have lunch on the train
<b> Ex: She’s wearing a ring on her thumb finger.</b>
<b>- AT : </b> Ex: I live at 10 Nguyen Van Cu Street.
- IN : Ex: I live in Buon Ma Thuot City.


<b>* Giới từ chỉ vị trí : above, around, behind, below, beside, between, far(away)from, in back of, in the back </b>
of , in front of , in the front of , in the middle of, inside, near, next to, on top of, out side, under


<b>* Giới từ chỉ phương hướng : </b>


into, out of, toward, across, through, around, down, up, along.
<b>B. EXERCISES</b>


<b>I. Put in the present perfect or past simple of the verbs in brackets.</b>
1. I ( do )... all the housework. The flat is ready clean now.


2. He ( write )... a novel for two years. But he (finish)...it yet.


3. What ... you ( do )...last week? ... you (play )...?


4. I like your car. How long ... you (have)...it?


5. Mai (buy)...a new dress last month but she (not wear) ...it yet.
<b>II. Fill in each blank with a suitable preposition:</b>


1. Please wait………me a few minutes.
2. You can use dictionary to find……… ………..new words.
3. They are proud ……….. their new house.


4. My sister is very good ………. Math.


5. Minh should work harder………. ………his English pronunciation.
6. Do you believe………ghosts?


7. Try to learn the meaning of new words………. heart.
8. I got good grade………... English and History.
9. It’s very kind ……….. you to say so.


10.She enjoys participating ……… raising funds for the poor.
11.Are you going to take part... this contest.?


12. Please fill ... this form.


13. We’ll arrive ... 5o’clock ... 12 February.
14. I’m usually free ... 8pm and 10pm.


15. My English class finishes ... 7.30. Let’s meet ...7.30
III. Put the verbs between brackets in their correct Infinitive or Gerund form :
1.The children are busy ( collect )... shells on the beach .



2.She had to ask the boys ( stop) ...( make )... noise .


3.Our teacher has promised ( help )... us ( prepare )... for the exam .
4.I’d love ( have ) ...an opportunity of (meet )... you again .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

8.My uncle used to ( show ) me where ( go ) and what ( buy ).


9.There is nothing like ( walk )... as a means of ( keep )...
10. We love ( play )... badminton on Sunday afternoon


<i><b>WEEK: 17</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 9 / 12 / 2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 51 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 10 / 12 / 2010</b></i>
<b> CONSOLIDATION</b>


<b>A. THEORY</b>


<b>1. Mẫu câu đủ hoặc không đủ cái gì để làm cái gì</b>
* S + Tobe + Adj + enough + ( for-O )+ To + V


<b>2 . Reported speech ( Lời nói trần thuật) Là câu thuật lại ý của người nói</b>


Khi chuyển một câu trực tiếp sang gián tiếp, Chúng ta phải đổi thì của động từ chính Direct speech:
Ex “I’ll talk to Hoa.”said he.


 Reported speech:


He said he would talk to Hoa


- Nếu chuyển từ câu trực tiếp sang câu gián tiếp mà đông từ tường thuật ở thì hiện tại thì ta khơng đổi thì
của động từ mà vẫn giữ nguyên như câu trực tiếp chỉ đổi các đại từ và trạng từ trong câu



Ex: Direct speech : “I’m arriving at about 6.00.”says Brenda.
Reported speech : Brenda says she’s arriving at about 6.00.


Note: - Có thể dùng “that” hoặc khơng dùng “that” trong câu tường thuật.
Ví dụ : He said (that) he wasn’t going.


- says / say to + O <b> tells / tell = O said to + O </b><b> told + O</b>


<b>Example : He told (said to) Helen (that) he didn’t like coffee.</b>
- Mootj số động từ không đổi khi chuyển sang câu gián tiếp.
<b>Would </b><b> would, could </b><b> could, might </b><b> might, </b>


<b>should </b><b> should, ought to </b><b> ought to</b>


<b>3. Comparison with: </b>
+ like


+ ( not ) as...as Ex: My bike is not modern as your bike.
+ ( not ) the same as Ex: My bag is the same her bag.


+ different from. Ex: My schoolbag is different from lan’s .
<b>4. Comparative and superlative adjectives:</b>


* Comparative:


<b> - Form: S1 + be + adj-er + than + S 2</b>


<b> S1 + be + more + Adj/ adv + than + S 2</b>
<b> Ex: The house is more expensive than an apartment.</b>


<b>* Superlative:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b>5. Pattern – Used to + Vinf : Đây là cấu trúc câu sử dụng để diễn tả một diều gì đó hay một thói quen trong</b>
quá khứ nhưng hiện tại khơng cịn xảy ra nữa. Thường được sử dụng với cấu trúc: USED + TO +


Vinfinitive


Ex: When I was young, I used to look after my younger brothers.
Note: Cần chú ý


+ Used to + bare infinitive -> chỉ thói quen trong quá khứ (past habit)
Ex: When he was a boy, he used to go swimming.


+ To be + used to+ V-ing -> chỉ ai đó đang quen với điều gì đó ở hiện tại (present habit)
To get + used to+ V-ing -> trở nên quen với


Ex : I am used to reading in the library.
<b>B. EXRCISES</b>


<b>I. Combine the following sentences using “ enough ”</b>
1. The music is very sort. We can’t hear it.


………
2. The film was interesting. He watched it.


………
3. Are you very tall? Can you reach the ceiling.


………
4. The question is difficult. We can’t answer it.



………..
5. Hung wasn’t hard-working. He couldn’t get good grades


……….
I


<b> I. Put the following commands and requests into reported speech :</b>
1. Their mother said to them “ Don’t make so much noise”


...
2. The traffic policeman said “ Show me your driving licence ,


please ?” ...
3. Mrs Jackson said to Tim “ Could you give me a hand,


please ?” ...
4. The lifeguard said “ Don’t swim too far, boys ”


...
5. Nam said to taxi driver, “Please turn left at the first traffic


light.” ...
6. She said to her son “ Go straight upstairs and get into


bed” ...
7. The policeman said “ Don’t touch anything in the


room” ...
8. Marry said to John “ Can you carry my suitcase, please? ”



...
9. He told us “ Please send me some money at once.


<i><b>WEEK: 18</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 13 / 12 / 2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 52 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 14 / 12 / 2010</b></i>


<b>THI KSCL cuèi kú i</b>
eeòffeeòffeeòffeeòffeeòffeeòffeeòff


<i><b>I- Phonetics: Odd one out</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

4. a. countless b. drought c. encourage d. overcrowding
<i><b>II. Supply the correct verbs form.</b></i>


1. My computer (not work) __________________since last week.
2. She (come) ________________________to France two years ago.
3. My father told me (not stay) ____________________up too late.


4. Would you like (go)______________________ to the cinema with me tonight?
<i><b>III. Rewrite the following sentences</b></i>


1. "Can you put my books onto the bookshelf over there, Huy?"


Lien asked Huy...
1. "Please turn off the radio."


Phuong told Tuan...
3. I didn't call her up 2 days ago.



I haven't_______________________________________________________
4. Did you finish the test an hour ago?


Have________________________________________________________?


<i><b>IV. Prepositions:</b></i>


1. Children are fond ______ picture books.
2. My sister is good ______ Maths and English.
3. Why don't you get acquainted ______ them first?
4. Tom is different ______ his parents.


5. Are you interested ______ that topic?
6. It’s very kind ______ you to say so.


7. I'll see you... 7.00...the morning
8. Mary was born...December 25.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

Alexander Graham Bell was born in 1847 in Edinburgh, Scotland. His father was an expert in
phonetics, the study of the sounds of languages. As a boy, Bell became interested in sounds and speech.
In 1870 the Bells decided to <i><b>emigrate</b> to America. <b>They</b> lived in Boston, where Alexander taught in a </i>
school for the deaf. There he began experimenting with a machine to help the deaf hear. While
experimenting with this machine, Bell had an idea. Why not use electricity to send the human voice
from one place to another? Bell began work on a new invention.


1. When and where was Alexander G. Bell born?
………..
2. What did he do when he lived in Boston?
………..



3. What idea did Bell have while experimenting with the machine?
……….


4. Was Bell invented the telephone?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<i><b>WEEK: 18</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 16 / 12 / 2010</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 53 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 17 / 12 / 2010</b></i>


<b>TEST CORRECTION</b>
<i><b>I- Phonetics: Odd one out</b></i>


1. a. loved b. learned c. played d. finished
2. a. complained b. smiled c. laughed d. gathered.
3. a. migrant b. resident c. equipment d. comment
4. a. countless b. drought c. encourage d. overcrowding
<i><b>II. Supply the correct verbs form.</b></i>


1. My computer (not work)-- was ‘nt__since last week.
2. She (come) ___came___to France two years ago.
3. My father told me (not stay) __not to stay_up too late.


4. Would you like (go)___to go__ to the cinema with me tonight?
<i><b>III. Rewrite the following sentences</b></i>


2. "Can you put my books onto the bookshelf over there, Huy?"
Lien asked Huy to put her book onto the bookshelf over there
2. "Please turn off the radio."


Phuong told Tuan to turn off the radio
3. I didn't call her up 2 days ago.



I haven't called her up for two days
4. Did you finish the test an hour ago?


Have you finished your test for an hour ?


<i><b>IV. Prepositions:</b></i>


1. Children are fond _of_ picture books.
2. My sister is good _at_ Maths and English.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

5. Are you interested _in_ that topic?
6. It’s very kind __of__ you to say so.
7. I'll see you..at... 7.00....in....the morning
8. Mary was born...on...December 25.


<i><b>VII.</b></i> <i><b>Read the following passage then answer the questions about it. </b></i>


Alexander Graham Bell was born in 1847 in Edinburgh, Scotland. His father was an expert in
phonetics, the study of the sounds of languages. As a boy, Bell became interested in sounds and speech.
In 1870 the Bells decided to <i><b>emigrate</b> to America. <b>They</b> lived in Boston, where Alexander taught in a </i>
school for the deaf. There he began experimenting with a machine to help the deaf hear. While
experimenting with this machine, Bell had an idea. Why not use electricity to send the human voice
from one place to another? Bell began work on a new invention.


1. When and where was Alexander G. Bell born?


Alexander Graham Bell was born in 1847 in Edinburgh, Scotland
2. What did he do when he lived in Boston?



he began experimenting with a machine to help the deaf hear
3. What idea did Bell have while experimenting with the machine?


He think why not use electricity to send the human voice from one place to another
4. Was Bell invented the telephone?


Yes, he was…


<i><b>WEEK: 21</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 02 / 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 54 </b></i> <i><b>Date of teaching: 03 / 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> UNIT 9 : A FIRST _ AID COURSE</b>


<b>Lesson 1 : Getting started & Listen and read</b>
<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson the ss will be able to:</b>


- know what they would do in the situation which require first-aid
<b>II. Language contents :</b>


_ Grammar : “ WILL” to make requests offers and promises
In order to / so as to…….


Future sim ple


_ Vocabulary : ambulance, emergency, unconscious, bleed, conscious, ...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

_ flash card, cassette, book.
<b>IV.. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher and student’s activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



<b>A. Warm up </b>


(Getting started)
* Kim’s game


<b>B. New lesson</b>


<i>1. Presentation</i>


T: Ask Ss to look at these things on page 80 and tell
them these things are often used for first-aid.


-Divide the class into 2 teams.


-Have Ss close their books and go to the board and
write the names of the things. ( May be English or
Vietnamese)


-T Give answer key.


<i>2. Practice </i>:


-Let ss to discuss and write down what they would do
in these situations which require first-aid.


( work in groups)


-T can supply the words for Ss if necessary.
-call on some groups to present their answers .
<i><b>* </b>Pre-teach</i>:<i> </i>



T: Set situation and give some new words by many
ways.


- Practice them


Ss: Look , copy down and practice
<i><b>* </b>While – reading</i><b> :</b>


T: Hang the chart with the paragraph on the board
-Ask Ss to predict the words in the gaps


-Call on some ss to go to the board and write their
words


T: play the tape again and have ss listen, then let
them check their prediction.


-Then Ss play the role to read the dialogue
<i><b>*</b> Post – reading :</i>


-Let Ss read the dialogue again and select the topic
covered in the dialogue (work in groups)
<b>C. Consolidation:</b>


- Remark all period


- Ask Ss role play to read the dialogue.
T: correct the mistakes



(Ss can retell the story)
D. Homework :


Let ss to learn all the new words by heart
-Prepare next part ‘Speak & Listen


1. Getting started
*Answer key


-emergency room: phoứng cp cu
-medicated oil: dầu dợc phÈm
-water pack: túi chêm nước đá
-sterile dressing: đồ băng bó vô trùng
-alcohol: cồn


.Discussing
-to ease : làm dịu
-a towel: khăn lau


-a handkerchief: (real thing)khăn tay
-cotton ball: (real thing)bông thấm nước
-a bandage: (real thing) băng


-an ice bag = water pack


- tiger balm: (real thing)dầu con hổ
* Possible answer:


a. I’ll use cold water to ease the pain



b. I’ll use alcohol / medicated oil / sterile dressing to
dress the pain


c. I’ll use the handkerchief to stop the bleeding / tell
her to line down.


d. I’ll use medicated oil.
2. Listen and read
a. New words


<b>-an emergency: ( trans) tình trạng câp cứu</b>
-an ambulance: ( pictch) xe cừu thương


-conscious >< uncurious:(adj) (trans) tỉnh >< bất
tỉnh


-to bleed: ( trans) chảy máu


-to wound (expl) làm bị thương . (n): vét thương
* Checking: Slap the board


b. Gap fill


“ There was an emergency at Lan’s school. A student
(1)...off her bike and hit head on the road. She
was (2)..., but she cut her head and the


(3) ... was (4) ...badly. Lan telephoned Bach
Mai hospital and asked the nurse to send an



( 5)... to Quang Trung school .Lan was asked to
keep the student (6) ...while waiting for the
ambulance.”


* Checking prediction


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

4.bleeding 5.ambulance 6. awake
c. Selection the topic:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

WEEK: 21 <i><b>Date of preparation: 03 / 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 55 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 04/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> UNIT 9 : A FIRST _ AID COURSE</b>


<b>Lesson 2: Speak & Language focus 3.4</b>


<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson, the sts will be able to make and respond request, offers and </b>
promises.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


j Grammar : Would you like...?;Can / could you...?
;I promise I’ll...; I promise I won’t…
k Vocabulary :


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ * pictures ; cassette;
<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher and student’s activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



<b>A. Warm up : Network</b>


T ask ss to give situations which require first-aid
* Possible answer:


+ Have a nose bleed.
+ Have a burn
+ Have a cut.
+ Have a bee sting
+ Have a snack bite.
-T sets the scene:


-Then ask ss some questions to elicit the model
sentences.


-Have Ss repeat 2 or 3 times before writing them on
the board.


<b>B. New lesson</b>


<i>1. Presentation</i>


T: Set situation and give the forms , explain clearly.
Ss: Listen carefully and copy down


T: give the structures
Ss :listen and copy.


<i>2. Practice</i>



T: Have ss look at each picture and practice
speaking in pairs.


Ss: Listen and do as directed then present before
class.


T: Control whole class and correct mistakes.


T: Ss look at the pictures on page 80 and match the


<b>1. Set the scene:</b>


a .I want you to get me a bandage. How can I say?
b. I’d like you to come to my party. How can I say ?
c. I’ll tell my mother that I’ll surely finish my work
before time. How can I say?


<b>2.Model sentences</b>


a. Will you get me a bandage, please?
b. Would you like to come to my party?


c .I promise I’ll finish my homework before time.
1. Speak


<b>* Form:</b>


<b>A. To make a request.(thỉnh cầu)</b>
Will



Would + you (please) + bare infinitive ?
Could


Can


+Responses:


(+) Sure / Ok / All right


(-) I’m sorry I can’t / I’m afraid I am not.
<b>B. To make an offer. (Để nghị)</b>


Will /won’t you


Shall I + bare infinitive ?
Can I


Would you like + to inf...?
What can I do / get for you?
Can I get...?


+Responses:


(+) yes, please / That would be nice.
(-) No, thinks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

situation with the right statement


Explain the way to use “adjective + to verb”


Give an example


SS: do the exercise


Guide SS the way to use:


<b>S + be + adj + that + noun clause</b>
Give some examples


SS: do the exercise follow the content of the test


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


+ Remark all period aloud before class.
<b>D. Homework :</b>


-Learnt the structures by heart.
-Prepare next part ‘Listen’


I promise I’ll / I won’t ...
I’ll..., I promise
I promise to ...
+Responses:


I hope so./ good / I’m glad / Don’t forget
LANGUAGE FOCUS 3


<i>Complete the dialogue, Use the words in the box</i>


Answer /key



a/ difficult to follow b/ easy to understand
c/ hard to believe d/ dangerous to go
e/ important to wait


LANGUAGE FOCUS 4


<i>Complete the letter Use the correct form of the verb be </i>
<i>and the adjectives in the box</i>


Key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

WEEK: 21 <i><b>Date of preparation: 06/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 56 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 07/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> UNIT 9 : A FIRST _ AID COURSE</b>


<b>Lesson 3: Listen & Language focus 1.2</b>


<b>I.</b> <b>Objective : By the end of the lesson, the ss will be able to </b>


listen to a paragraph for details about the activities taking place in an emergency room.
<b>II. Language contents :</b>


j Grammar :


k Vocabulary : eye chart, paramedic, wheelchair, stretcher, crutch


<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


+ pictures ; cassette


<b>IV. Procedures :</b>


<i><b>Teacher and student’s activities</b></i> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : Guessing from context</b>


T : Have Ss look at the pictures on page 82 and
write out all the words describing the actions of
the people in it ( work in 4 groups)


Sts : do as directed
<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre - listening :


-T introduces some new words by using pictures
or translating.


-T reads, Ss repeat
2. While-listening


T: Have ss listen to the tape 3 times and do as
requested


Ss: Listen carefully and try to do.


<i>TAPE TRANSCRIPT</i>


This is the emergency room in a large hospital .A
paramedic is wheeling a patient on a stretcher into
the emergency room where a doctor is waiting to


treat the patient .The patient doesn’t look well.
His head is bandaged and his eyes are closed.
A nurse is pushing an empty wheelchair towards
the exit. She is probably taking it to a patient in
the ambulance.


The eye chart on the wall is used to check
people’s eyesight. The chart consists of about 28
letters ranging in size from about 5 centimeters in
height at the top of the chart to about 1 centimeter
at the bottom.


A doctor is trying to weight a crying baby on the
scale.


The baby’s mother is standing nearby. She is
trying to stop her child from crying.


* Possible answer:
-Drive


-Wheel /move /push
-Weight


-Lie -Stand


-an eye chart (trans/ pict): bàng đo thị lực
-a paramedic (expl): hộ lý


( She takes care of patients but she isn’t a doctor nor a


nurse)


-to wheel (action) đẩy, kéo
a wheelchair : xe đẩy
-a stretcher (pict) cái cáng
-a crutch (pict) cái nạn
-a scale (trans) cái cân


<i>*Checking slap the board</i>


1.Matching


1. The girl has a burn on her hand.
2.The girl has a bad fever.


3.The boy has just broken vase.
4.The boy has a headache.
5.The boy has a snake bite.


<i>* Answer key:</i>


1:a 2: d 3:e 4:b 5:c
2. Picture Drill


a: request d: offer
b: offer / request e: promise
c: offer / request


EX: (b): Sister: Can I get you some medicines?
Boy: yes, please.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

The crutches ,which are for someone with a
broken leg, are leading against the wall.


T: Ask Ss to look at the pictures in your books
again and match the letter A,B,C, D, E ,f to the
correct words in the box


-T gives answer key


-T set the scene: You are going to listen to
paragraph about the activities taking place in an
emergency room which contains the words on the
board.


-Have ss guess the order of the words.
-Give feed back.


-Let Ss listen and check their prediction
-Give answer key.


3. Post-listening


-Ask Ss to read the statements carefully.
Have Ss work in pairs to decide which of the
statement is true and which is false.


-Ss listen and check their prediction.
Sts : listen and do their task.



T : call some sts to read their answer aloud
Compare with their guessing


Give the correct answer


Explain the way to use “Passive form”
Give an example


SS: do the exercise


<b>C. Consolidation</b>
_ Remark all period
<b>D. Homework :</b>


<b>-Learn vocabulary by heart.</b>
-Prepare next part ‘Read +Lf1’


( She takes care of patients but she isn’t a doctor nor a
nurse)


-to wheel (action) đẩy, kéo
a wheelchair : xe đẩy
-a stretcher (pict) cái cáng
-a crutch (pict) cái nạn
-a scale (trans) cái cân


<i>*Checking slap the board</i>


+ Matching:



A: ambulance D: eye chart
B: wheelchair E: scale
C: crutches F: stretcher
<b>*Ordering prediction</b>


<b>* T /F statements</b>


1.The doctor is wheeling the patient into the emergency
room.


2.The patient’s head is headache.


3.A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a patient on it.
4.The eye chart consists of 28letters ranging in different
size.


5.The baby’s mother is trying to stop the nurse from
weighing her baby.


<i>*Answer key:</i>


1.F (a endemic)
2.T, 4.T


3.F (empty wheelchair)


5.F (stop her baby from crying)
LANGUAGE FOCUS 1


Passive form


LANGUAGE FOCUS 2


Passive form
Do as language focus 1


<i><b> WEEK: 22</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 10/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 57 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 11/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> UNIT 9 : A FIRST _ AID COURSE</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<i><b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson, the ss will be able to use “in order to” and “so as to” indicate </b></i>
purpose read the text about more situations requiring first-aid.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


j Grammar : in order to, so as to
k Vocabulary :


lie flat, elevate, victim, overheat, tissue, damage.


<b>III . Teaching aids</b><i><b> </b><b> :</b></i>


pictures ; cassette; flash card, book.
<i><b>IV. Procedures :</b></i>


<i><b>Teacher and student’s activities</b></i> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : Bingo</b>


T: asks ss to choose 4 words on the board
and write them down on a piece of paper.


T: calls out the words until someone has
ticked all the four words and shouts ‘Bingo’
<b>B: New lesson</b>


1. Pre - reading :


T:-give meaning of some new words
- write them on the board.
- Read them


Ss : copy – repeat


-Ask Ss to think of what to do in these
emergency cases


2. While - reading


-Have ss open their book and read the
instructions on page 83


-Ask Ss to go to the board and add the
missing information.


T : Ask Ss to read the statements on page 84
and match three leading A,B,C, to them.
(group work)


Sts : read and do their task.
T: correct



-Ask the question to elicit the answer:


Burn, cut, bee sting, snake bite, fainting, shock, nose bleed


1.Pre-teach.
*Vocabulary :


-to lie flat (trans) nằm duỗi tay


-to elevate >< to lower (trans) nâng cao >< hạ thấp
-a victim (expl) nạn nhân (a person who needs first-aid)
-to overheat (expl) làm nóng (make sth to hot)


-tissue (n) (trans) cơ


-damage (n) (trans) sự hư hại
-to ease = to stop làm dịu


-to minimize (trns) giảm đến mức tối thiểu
-shock (n) (trans) cú sốc, choáng


Check : Rub out and remember
2. Network


let the victim lie down


cool the burn with ice


Don’t give the victim lie down
1.Adding missing information


2.Matching


A: a, c, e
B: b
C: d


3. Model Sentences


+.Why should we cool the burn immediately?


We should do it so as to / in order to minimize the tissue


shock


First-aid


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

3. Post – reading :


T: Ask ss some sentences.
Ss: Listen and try to answer.
4. Further practice


T: Guide SS to match the sentences
Ss: work individually


T: Call on some ss to read their answers
<b>C. Consolidation</b>


<i>-</i>Read the instruction and fill the
information



T: Ask Ss to read the text again then answer
some questions


Ss: Listen and try to do and answer.


<b>D. Homework : </b>


-Learn vocabulary by heart.
-Prepare next part ‘Write’


damage


Form: so as to +bare infinitive
in order to


Meaning: để


Use : to indicate purposes


-What should we do when a person has a shock / a burn /
fainting?


-What shouldn’t we do when a person has a shock / a burn /
fainting?


<i>-</i>Read the instruction and fill the information


<i>Cases</i> <i>Do</i> <i>Don’t</i>
<i>Fainting</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

<i><b> WEEK: 22</b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 11/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 58 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 12/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> UNIT 9 : A FIRST _ AID COURSE</b>


<b>Lesson 5: Write</b>


<i><b>I.</b></i> <i><b>Objectives</b><b> </b><b> : By the end of the lesson, the ss will be able to </b></i>
<i><b> know how to write a thank- you note</b></i>


<b>II. Language contents :</b>
j Grammar :


k Vocabulary : cheer- up, come over, thank ...


<b>III. Teaching aids : </b>


book, flash card.
IV. Procedures :


<i><b>Teacher and student’s activities</b></i> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up<b> : Shark attack</b>
T: guide ss to play the game
Ss: Listen and try to play


B. New lesson
1. Pre - writing :


T: Set situation and guide ss to complete letter.


- Gives new words by translating or explaining.
T: Practice and ss repeat.


T : ask Ss to complete the thank-you note on page
84 (individually)


-Give feedback


Ss: Listen and try to complete and write on the
board.


-T read and correct
Ss : Look and read again
2. While- writing


T: Guide ss to write a thank-you note by answering
the questions on page 85 then join the sentences
into a paragraph.(pairs work)


T: have ss write a thank-you note.
Sts : work in individual


T : move around to help ss


<b></b>


à


(lie flat, elevate, lower, victim,. ease)
+ Write



* vocabulary


-thank sb for sth / thank sb doing sth (trans)
-a thank-you note (trans) thư cảm ơn


-to cheer sb up (expl) (make sb feel happier)
--to come pver to (trans) thăm ai, tạt lại chơi
1. Gap fill


1.was 2.were 3.helped
4.came 5.am 6.’ll telephone
2. Write a letter…


<i><b>Thank you very much for the gift you sent me on </b></i>
<i><b>my birthday. It was very lovely and it really made </b></i>
<i><b>me feel happier.</b></i>


<i><b>Now I am very please . Will you go on a picnic with </b></i>
<i><b>me on the weekend? I’d love to see you.</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

3. Post – writing :


T : Call some ss to go to the board and write their
letters on the board.


-T correct.


-Ss read the statements and do T/f
ss : do as directed



-Give the answer key.


<b>C..Consolidation</b>
_ Remark all period
D. Homework<b> : </b>


-Ask ss to write the letter (after correction) on their
notebooks


-Write a thank-you note with situation: “Your
friend give you a postcard on Christmas.”


-Prepare next part ‘Getting started ,Listen and Read
of Unit 10’


3. T / F statements


a. Nga writes to thank Hoa for some candy.
b. Hoa’s gift cheered Nga up.


c. Nga would like Hoa to see her at the hospital.
d. Nga is very bored now.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

<b> WEEK: 22</b> <i><b>Date of preparation: 13/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 59 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 14/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>


LESSON 1: GETTING STARED _ LISTEN & READ
<b>I. Objectives :</b>



_ At the end of this lesson ss can :


- explain these things according to the theme.
- Practice to read & understand about recycling.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : Review “ can - could”


_ Vocabulary: cloth bag, plastic bag, over packaged, reduce, reuse, recycle.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , cassette and sub-board
<b>iV. Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warming up : network


T: Have ss to write some recycling things
( Vietnamese)


Ss: Listen and try to write
B. New lesson


1.


Presentation


T: Set situation and introduce some new words


and practice them.


Ss: Listen and write down


T: guide ss to practice getting started.


Ss: First ss discuss about recycling then practice
speaking before class.


T: Listen and correct their mistakes.


*. Check new words
Slap the board


2. Practice


T: First set situation , introduce some new words
them practice them clearly


Ss: Listen and practice


T: Let ss listen to the dialogue 2 time then role


cans Glass


I. Getting stared
* New words
- Cloth bag:
- plastic bag:
- over packaged:


* Should


+ use cloth bags instead of plastic bags


+ Use tree leaves to wrap things such as : banana
leaves, lotus leaves…….


* Shouldn’t


+ buy things over packaged
+ Use products never rot.


+ Buy “ throw- away” products…


II. Listen and read
1. New words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

play and read


Ss: try to listen and do as directed.


T: Have ss practice answering question in pairs
and in group then present before class.


Ss: Listen and practice


T: Control and correct mistakes
C. Consolidation.


T: Remark all period and ask ss some questions


about recycling.


Ss: Listen and try to answer.
T: Listen and correct these answer
D. Homework


_ Have ss learn new words and do exercises.


- reduce: ( trans)
- reuse: ( example)


Ex: We can reuse plastic bags
- recycle: ( example)


Ex: Metal, glass, paper…. can be recycled/
2. Answer


a. Reduce means not buying products which are over
packaged.


b. We can reuse things like envelopes, glass, plastic
bottles, and old plastic bags.


c. We can look for information on recycling things by
having a contact with an organization like Friends of
the Earth, going to the local library or asking your
family & friends.


d. B/c plastic bags are difficult to be destroyed.
1. What would you do with waste paper?


2. What would you do with plastic bags?


<i><b> WEEK: 23 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 17/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 60 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 18/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>


<b> LESSON 2 SPEAK & LANGUAGE FOCUS 3,4</b>
<b>I. Objectives : </b>


- By the end of the lesson, students practice in giving and responding to instructions
- To help Ss practice doing exercise 3,4 in language focus


<b>II. Language contents : </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<i>2. Vocabulary: leather, metal, food / drinking can, compost, heap, shade, shovel, moisture,</i>
condensation …


<b>III. Teaching aids : </b>


- Pictures text books, a cassette player
<b>IV. Procedures : </b>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b>


<b>Content</b>
- T uses the picture ( p/91 )


- T asks Ss to work in group ( 4 or 5 Ss )


- T asks Ss to name things they can see in the


picture


- Elicit words from Ss
- T has Ss copy down


- T has Ss play game Bingo in order to check
vocabulary


- T gets Ss to brainstorm a list of about 10 new
words


- T asks Ss to choose any 4 words and copy into
their papers


- T calls out the words until a / some Ss has / have
ticked all of their words and shout ‘bingo’. They
win


- T has Ss play game dictation list


- T tells Ss they are going to listen to the words for
items and put them in the right groups


- T draws the table on the board and ask Ss to copy
it .


- Model some words


- Read the words ( in the table below ) aloud ,
slowly and jumble them up



- After listening, T asks Ss to work in pairs and
give their answer


- Ss read the words again and correct
- T asks Ss to work in pairs


- Ss practice with your partner about the two
conversations


- T asks Ss to make new conversations by using
suggested words


- Ss practice them in front of the class
- T corrects if necessary


- Ss complete the words
- Ss give feedback


*Warm up:
Kim’s game
Possible answer :


Bottles , paper , clothes , used paper , old
newspapers , books , cardboard , boxes , plastic
bags , food can , jars , drinking tins , vegetable
matter , shoes , school bag …


* Speak:



Pre - speaking:


 <b>New words :</b>


- Fertilizer (n): Farmers often use this thing to
make their plants or trees grow well. What is
it? <sub></sub> to fertilize(v)


- Compost (make question?)


What do you call the fertilizer made from spoiled
food , leaves, vegetable matter …




a compost heap


- fabric ( n ) <sub></sub> realia : clothes
What are these clothes made of?


- leather ( question )


Our shoes, sandals are often made of …?


 Bingo :


EX : fertilizer, compost, leather, fabric, plastic,
glass, metal, paper, cardboard, tin,…


Group Items



Paper Use paper ( old newspaper, books,
cardboard boxes …)


Glass Bottles, glasses, jars
Plastic Plastic bags, plastic bottles
Metal Food cans, drinking tins


Fabric Clothes ( clothes bags , material )
Leather Shoes, sandals, schoolbags
Vegetable


Matter


Fruit peels ( vegetables, rotten
fruits )


While - speaking:
<b>EX :</b>


A : Which group do clothes belong to ?
B : Put them in “ fabric ”


A: What can we do with those clothes?


B : We can recycle them and make them into paper
or shopping bags


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

T presents adjectives followed by a noun clause
-T explains how to do and asks Ss to do exercise


-T presents new words


-Ss copy down


-T asks Ss to play game “ matching ”
-Ss do it ( pair work )


-T calls several Ss go to the board
-Ss complete the dialogues.


-T corrects if necessary
-T gives marks


-T explains how to do and asks Ss to do exercise
-Ss do it ( pair work )


-T calls several Ss go to the board
-Ss complete the sentence


-T corrects if necessary
-T gives mark


Post - speaking:
<b>Complete the words</b>


<b> FE-TIL-ZER </b><sub></sub> FERTILIZER
COMP-ST <sub></sub> COMPOST
M-TAL <sub></sub> METAL
F-B-IC <sub></sub> FABRIC
REC-CL- <sub></sub> RECYCLE


B-LO-G <sub></sub> BELONG
<i>3. Complete the dialogues. </i>
<i> 1… easy to understand.</i>


2…hard to believe
3… dangerous to go …
4… important to wait …
Answer:


easy to understand (1)
hard to believe (2)
dangerous to go (3)
important to wait (4)
3. Complete the letter..
Answer
1… was happy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

<b> WEEK: 23 </b> <i><b>Date of preparation: 18/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 61 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 19/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>


LESSON 2 LISTEN & LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2
<b>I. Objectives :</b>


_ At the end of this lesson ss can :
- Give & respond to instructions
- Know how to make compost.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


_ Grammar : adjective followed by an infinitive. Passive in Future simple / Present Simple


It + be + Adj + To- Inf / that clause


Vocabulary: food can, metal.
<b>III. Teaching aids :</b>


_ Color chalk , cassette and sub-board
<b>IV..Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher & ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.</b> <b>Warming up :</b>
<b> network</b>


T: have ss write some recycling and reuse
things.


Ss: Try to remember and write.
<b>B. New lesson</b>


1. Presentation
* Pre-listening


T: Set situation and guide ss to do.
Ss: Listen carefully.


T asks Ss some questions about compost. What
can we do with “vegetable matter” ?


Do you know how to make compost ?
.Should you water the compost ?


* While-listening


Tell Ss they are going to listen to an expert
who gives the instructions to make compost.
Ask Ss to open their books and read the
multiple choice questions on page 91.
Check if Ss understand the questions


Play the tape 2 or 3 times. Ss listen and do the
exercise.


Ss answer and T corrects.
* Post- listening


Ss: choose true or false


T asks Ss to correct the false sentences


Listen.


* Tape transcript:


a. What type of garbage can you put in the compost?
Today I’m going to explain how to start a compost heap
First of all you must only vegetable matter, which
includes tea leaves, eggs shells-but wash the shell first-
and tissues. Don’t use any meat or grain products because
this attracts rats.


b. Where is the best place in your garden heap?


Find a place in your garden that gets a few hours of
sunlight each day. Use picks or shovels to turn the
compost regularly so it gets plenty of air.


c. Should you water the compost?


The compost also needs moisture, but it will get this
form condensation( sự ngưng tụ) . Cover the heap with a
sheet of strong plastic if the weather is very wet.


d. How long does it take before you can use the
compost ?


Keep adding to the pile and after about six months, your
compost will be ready to use as fertilizer.


<i>True or false statements </i>


a/ The expert explains how to start a compost heap
b/We can use meat or grain products to make compost


c/ We should find a place in our garden that gets a few hours of sunlight
each day


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

-T presents passive in future simple
-T explains form and gives an example


-T explains how to do and asks Ss to do
exercise



-Ss do it ( pair work )


-T calls several Ss go to the board
-Ss write the sentence


-T corrects if necessary
-T gives mark


<b>*Matching</b>


-T explains how to do and asks Ss to do
exercise


-Ss do it ( pair work )


-T calls several Ss go to the board
Ss complete the dialogue


T corrects if necessary
T gives mark


-T presents adjective followed by an infinitive.
<b>C. Consolidation</b>


_ Remark all period.
<b>D. Homework</b>


-Do exercise in the workbook.
-Learn new words



-Prepare: lesson 3 Read.


e/ If the weather is very wet , we should cover the heap with a sheet of
strong plastic


<b>Activities </b>


<i>1. Work with a partner. Read a guide on how to recycle</i>
<i>glass. Look at the instructions, rewrite them in the</i>
<i>passive form and put the pictures in the correct order</i>
Answer (1/p.95)


a. The glass is broken into small pieces.


b. Then the glass is washed with a detergent liquid.
c. Then the glass pieces are dried completely.
d. They are mixed with certain specific chemicals.
e. The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid.
f. A long pipe is used. It is dipped into the liquid. Then
the liquid is blown into intended shape.


a-1, b-4, c-3, d-5, e-2, f-6


* Passive in future simple :


EX: When will the project be started?
Form : S + will / shall + be + past participle


<i>2. A famous inventor, Dr. Kim, is going to build a time</i>
<i>machine. One of his assistants, Hai, is asking him</i>


<i>questions about the invention. Complete the dialogue.</i>
<i>Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets.</i>


1. … It will be shown …
2. Will … be built …
3. …will be finished …
4. Will … be made …
* Adjective + to infinitive :


EX: It’s difficult to follow your directions.
Form : It + be + adjective + to infinitive
* Adjectives + that / noun clause :


EX: We are delighted that you passed the English exam.


<i><b> WEEK: 23 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 20/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 62 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 21/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>


LESSON 4 READ
<b>I. Objectives</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

1. Grammar:Passive form in the Present Simple tense.


2. Vocabulary: tire(n), pipe (n), deposit (n), refill (v), melt (v)
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


<b> _ word square chart, photocopied pictures (p.95), drawing…</b>
<b>IV. Procedures:</b>



<b>Teacher and SS’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up :</b>


Revision : Word square


T: Put the word square chart on the board
Tell Ss the topic is about the environment and
there are 14 hidden words.


_ Divide the class into 4 groups.


Ask Ss to write their answer on a piece of
paper and hand in when they finish.


_Tell Ss the group with the most right words is
the winner


T presents new words
Ss repeat and say meaning
Ss copy


B. New lesson
1. Pre-reading


Ss play the game to check Vocabulary


T: Draw the grid on the board and have Ss:
Copy it.



Ask Ss to open their books and read the text
Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of
recycling facts mentioned in the text call on
some Ss to write the information in the grid on
the board.


Ÿ Rub out and Remember


2. While-reading


T: Ask Ss to work individually to answer the
questions on page 93.


Let Ss compare their answer with their
partners (pair work)


Call on some Ss to answer
T corrects


Elicit the model sentences forms Ss the have
Ss repeat.


Ss listen carefully and notice the grammar
point.


Ÿ Comprehension questions (Read 1)


E N V I R O N M E N T


N B C G A R B A G E R



V E D R D O P P U R E


E J U E Y I L A R S C


L U S E D P A P E R Y


O S T N O T S E D E C


P R O T E C T R U U L


E A B R C A I B C S E


R E C E E N C A E E K


D E E E F G H G I J L


Answer key


Environment, garbage, pure, used paper, protect.


Envelope, dust, green tree, can, plastic paper bag, reduce,
reuse, recycle.


Read


Ÿ New words
-tire: (n) ( translation)
-pipe: (n) ( real thing)
-deposit :(n) ( translation)



-refill (v): to fill something empty again
-melt freeze


Ÿ Grid (Read 2)


Answer:


Used things Recycling Facts
Car tires


Milk bottles
Glass
Drink cans


Household and
garden waste


are recycled to make
pipes and floor recovering


are cleaned and refilled (with
milk)


is broken up, melted and made
into new glassware


are brought back for recycling
is made into compost



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

After Ss copy in their notebooks.


3. Post-reading
T gives an example
Ss retell the story with
Passive Form


They can tell main details
C. Consolidation


T: Speak the way to use the passive voice form
Ss: Listen and copy down


D. Homework


-Learn by heart Voc + Passive Form
-Do exercise in workbook


-Prepare: Lesson 5 write


a/ People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles.


b/ The glass is broken up, melted and made into new
glassware


c/ The Oregon government made a new law that there must be
a deposit on drink cans. The deposit is returned when people
bring the cans back for recycling.


e/ If we have a recycling story to share, we can call or fax the


magazine at 5 265 456


Ÿ Model sentence: Passive Voice/Form


Car
tires
Glass
S


are
is
be


recycled
recycled
past part


To make pipes and
floor coverings
into new glassware
Concept checking.


Ÿ Change an active sentence to a passive one+ Form: Passive


Form in the Present Simple


Subject+ am/is/are + Past Participle


+ Use: it is used when the subject is affected by the action of
the verb (Vietnamese can be used for weaker students)



Active S + V + O
Passive S + be + Vpp + by O


Eg: I love my parents


My parents are loved by me


<i><b> WEEK: 24 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 24/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 63 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 25/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b> Unit 10: RECYCLING</b>


LESSON 5 Write
<b>I. Objectives</b>


At the end of lesson students will be able to:


- write a set of instructions on how to recycle used things using the sequencing.
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Grammar: none


2. Vocabulary: soak (v), mash (v), wire mesh (n) , bucket (n)
<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


_ Drawing, mine, photocopied pictures (p.94).
<b>IV. Procedures</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

<b>A. Warm up/</b>
Marks



T: Write 9 numbers on the board, from 1 to 9


Tell Ss each numbers is for a question but 3 of them are
lucky numbers. If Ss choose a lucky number, they do
not have to answer any question but they get 2 points
and they can choose another numbers.


Divide the class into 2 teams
T: I remarks and give marks


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre-writing


T: Set situation and then present some new words
Ss: repeat and say the meaning


T: Set the scene: Tell Ss they are going to read a text
<i><b>about how to recycle used paper. Put the verbs on the </b></i>
<i><b>board randomly in a flow chart </b></i><sub></sub> 2. While-writing
- Ask Ss to work in groups to guess the order of the
actions.


- Call on about 2 pairs to write their answer on the
board.


- Explain the process of recycling
T: corrects


- Ask Ss to open their books, read the text on page 93


and fill in the verbs.


T: correct and Ss copy the exercise in their notebooks.
T: ask Ss to close their books.


Write the sequencing on the board and have Ss practice
speaking first.


Call on Ss to say the sentences from memory
First, __________


Then, _________
Next, _________
After that, _____
Finally, _______


Ss write the text in brief using the sequencing
Ss work in group


T corrects
3. Post writing


T: Ask some ss to read aloud before class
Ss: Listen and do as requested.


T: Listen and correct


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


T: Stick the photocopied pictures on the board



<b></b> Lucky Numbers


1. Lucky Numbers


2. Say this sentence into the passive
“People speak English everywhere”
3. Say this sentence in the active
“Cartoons are liked by most children”


4. Lucky number
5. Lucky number


6. Passive: “We do not use things carefully”
7. Active: “Are candies liked by the children ?”
8. Passive: “Mr Han teaches Maths”


9. Passive:” Vegetarians do not eat meat”
WRITE


New words:


-soak (v): put sth in liquid for a time so that it
becomes completely wet


-mash (v)(translation ) đánh nhừ, nghiền nát
-wire mesh (n) )(translation ) lưới thép


-bucket (n) ( drawing) thùng, xô



<b></b> Slap the board


<b></b> Ordering prediction (write 1)


soak dry pull out mix


press mash


1_______ 2_______ 3________
4_______ 5_______ 6________


<i>Answer key</i>


1. soak 2. mash 3. mix


4. pull out 5. press 6. dry


<b></b> Write 2


<i>Answer key</i>


1. use 2. mix 3. place 4. press
5. wrap 6. wait 7. dry


<b></b> Recall


->Answer key


First, soak old newspaper in a bucket overnight.
Then, mash the paper by a wooden spoon. Next,


mix the mashed paper with water. After that, use a
wire mesh to pull the mixture out, put it on the
cloth and press it down firmly (mạnh, chặt)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

randomly (cảm tính, tùy ý)


- Ask Ss to listen and work in groups to rearrange the
pictures according to the instructions on how to prepare
the tealeaves


Ss :answer
T: corrects


<b>D. Homework</b>


-Write the instructions on how to make a thing you
have ever made using the sequencing


-Do exercise in workbook


-Prepare lesson 6 Language Focus


<b></b> Ordering Pictures


a. First take the used tea leaves from the tea pot
b. Next scatter the tealeaves on a tray


c. Then dry the leaves in the sun


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

<i><b> WEEK: 24 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 25/ 01 / 2011</b></i>


<i><b> Period : 64 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 26/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b>Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM</b>


LESSON 1: GETTING STARED _ LISTEN & READ
<b> I. Objectives :</b> By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to


use some expressions to express their interest
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary: crop (n) sugar cane (n) water buffalo (n)
forty-minute drive


2. Grammar: The drive takes 40 minutes  It’s a 40-minute drive


<b>III. Teaching aids: cassette, 2 charts (jumbled words and pre-question), pictures</b>
<b>IV. Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up


T: put the chart with jumbled words on the
board


- ask two groups to connect the words to
make the right phrase for places of interest
and write them on the board as fast as
possible


T: ask Ss to open books and match the names


with the pictures


T corrects


B. New lesson
1. Presentation


T Set situation and present some new words
then practice them.


Ss: Look copy and repeat then practice.
T can give an example


T asks Ss to notice that a plural noun must be
changed to the singular form when preceding
the noun it modifies in a noun phrase


2. Practice


T: hold class to play “Bingo”
- set the scene


- put the chart with questions


Teacher gives Ss a few minutes to think about
the questions


<i><b>Jumbled words</b></i>


1. Getting started:


Answer key


Ngo mon Gate, Ha Long Bay, The Temple literature, Nha
Rong Harbor


a/ Ngo Mon Gate
b/ Nha Rong Harbor


c/ The Temple Literature
d/ Ha Long Bay


2. Listen and read:
* Presentation


<b></b> Pre-teach Voc


crop (n) (something such as grain, rice, fruit … is grown in
one season)


Sugar cane (what is used to make sugar)
water buffalo  buffaloes


forty minute drive (n)
Model sentence


The drive takes 40 minutes




It’s a 40-minute drive



<b></b> Bingo


<b></b> Pre-questions


Harbor Gate


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

T asks Ss to listen to the tape


Have Ss work in pairs to answer the questions
Call on some pairs to give their answers
T: correct and have ss to read dialogue in
group of five.


Ss: Listen and practice as directed.
T: Listen and correct mistakes.


3. Further practice


T asks Ss to work in pairs again and choose
true or false


- Then work in groups to correct the false
sentences


Ss: Listen and choose then write on the board.
C. Consolidation


T: Remark all period and ask Ss to discuss
and pick out the sentences containing the


situations mentioned


Ss work in groups
D. Homework


-Learn new words by heart
-Do exercises in workbooks


-Prepare: Lesson 2 Speak + focus 3


1. Where does Hoa meet The Jones?


2. Is it the first time The Jones have visited Vietnam ?
3. How do they travel to Hanoi ?


4. What do they see along the road to Hanoi ?
5. What would Tim like to do ?


Practice


Answer keys


1. Hoa meets the Jones at the airport
2. Yes, it is


3. By taxi


4. They see a boy riding a water buffalo rice paddies, corn and
sugar cane fields



5. He’d like to take a photo
Answer key


a. T
b. T


c. False  … in a taxi


d. T


e. F  Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are grown
around Hanoi


* to express interest:


Ex: I’d like you to meet my parents…
-I’d like to




* to express a request


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

<b> WEEK: 24 </b> <i><b>Date of preparation: 27/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 65 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 28/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<b>Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM</b>


LESSON 2: SPEAK + LANGUAGE FOCUS 3,4
<b>I. Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to



- make and respond to formal requests using “mind”
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: 1. Would you mind/ Do you mind + V-ing … ?
2. Would you mind if I + Verb (in Past tense) …?
3. Do you mind if I+ Verb (in Present simple tense …)?
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


- Card boards, a mapped dialogue chart / - Mapped Dialogue
<b>IV. Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>


T chooses a student and ask him/her to go to the
front of class with his/her back to the board.
Write the information on the board.


Ask the rest of the class try to help the student
guess what is written on the board by asking
question until he/she says out the right word (s)
on the board


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre-speaking



T :set the scene


- Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and
Mr Jones and between Hoa and Tim in the last
dial and elicit the sentences from Ss


T: write the models on the board
Ss: copy and notice the form of verbs


T: set the scene: You are a tourist on vacation in
<i><b>HCM city. You want to visit a market. This is a</b></i>
<i><b>conversation between you and the tourist officer.</b></i>
2. While-speaking


Open pairs: Ask some pairs to demonstrate the
dial


Closed pairs. Have Ss open their books and use
the information on page 101 to practice other
dialogues.


Group 1: Markets
Group 2: Museums
Group 3: Restaurants


T: prepare 4 cardboards with cues including
checks (v) and crosses (x)


<b></b> Game: What does it say ?



Ex: On the board: Yes, I do
Ss ask: Do you like your teacher ?
Or on the board: Everyday


Ss say: How often do you have a shower ?
* SPEAK


I/ Pre-teach structures


<b>Model sentences</b>


1. A:Would you mind/sitting in the front seat of the taxi ?
B: No problem


2. A: Would you mind / if I took a photo
B: Not at all


Use: To make and respond to formal requests
Form:


1. Would you mind/ Do you mind + V-ing ?
2. Would you mind if I + Verb (Past tense) …?
Do you mind if I + Verb (Present tense) …?
Responses


<b></b> Agreement


No, I don’t know/ No, of course not/Not at all/Please
do/Please go ahead



<b></b> Disagreement


I’m sorry, I can’t / I’m sorry, it’s impossible
I’d prefer you didn’t / I’d rather you didn’t.


<b></b> Meaning: Xin bạn cảm phiền ..
<b></b>


Mapped dialogue



You Tourist officer


Excuse me


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

3. Post-speaking


T: model the first cue 2 times


T: call 2 or 3 Ss to repeat it & correct
Ss work in pairs


Get the whole class to practice all the exchanges
4. Further practice


T: First guide , then ask ss to practice speaking in
pairs.


Ss: Look , listen and practice.
T: Control and correct mistakes.



- T presents how to make formal requests and
respond


Cardboard drill (language focus 3)
a. novel/car (v) c. get/coffee (x)
b. put out/ cigarette (v) d. wait/moment (x)
Eg: T: Would you mind moving your car?
Ss: No, of course not


-T asks Ss to practice language focus 3/p.109
-Ss work in pairs


-T calls on some Ss to practice
-T corrects if necessary .


-T explains how to use “mind " to make request
and respond


-T explains how to do the exercise -4/110
-Ss work in pairs


-T calls on some Ss to practice
-T corrects if necessary


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


_ Remark all period aloud before class.
<b>D. Homework</b>


-Choose the information on p 101 and write down


a complete dialogue, using your own words
-Do exercises in workbook


-prepare: Lesson 3. Listen + Read 1


market. Would you
mind suggesting one?
That sounds interesting.
Thank you


How about going to
Thai Binh Market? It
opens from about 5
a.m to 8 p.m


You’re welcome


<i>3/ Use these words to make and respond to requests .</i>
1. Would/do you mind + V-ing…?


Responses:
Agreement :


No , I don’t mind / No , of course not /Not at all …
Disagreement :


I’m sorry , I can’t / I’m sorry /It’s impossible
I’d rather you didn’t /I’d prefer you didn’t
Ex:



1. Would you mind moving your car?
No, of course not.


<b>b/ Would you mind putting out your cigarette ?</b>
No , of course not .


<b>C/ Would you mind getting me some coffee ?</b>
I’m sorry , I’m too busy right now .


<b>D/ Would you mind waiting a moment ?</b>
I’m sorry , I can’t . I’m already late for work .
<i>4.Look at the pictures.Ask questions/give responses.</i>


1. Do you mind if I + V(present simple)…?
2. Would you mind if I + V(past simple)…?
EX : “Do you mind if I sit down? - Please do.” Or
“Would you mind if I smoked? - I’d rather you didn’t.”
* Responses:


Agreement :


No , I don’t mind /No , of course not /Not at all /Please
go ahead


Disagreement :


I’m sorry , I can’t / I’m sorry /It’s impossible/I’d rather
you didn’t


<b>C/ Do you mind If I postpone our meeting ?</b>


Not at all .


<b>D/ Do you mind If I turn off the stereo ?</b>
I’d rather you didn’t .


<b>E/ Would you mind If I turned on the air- conditioner ?</b>
Please do .


<b>F/ Do you mind If I watch TV while eating lunch ?</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

<b> WEEK: 25 </b> <i><b>Date of preparation: 8/ 02 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 66 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 9/ 02 / 2011</b></i>
<b>Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM</b>


LESSON 3 : LISTEN AND LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2
<b>I. Objectives</b>


_ At the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get information from simple tourist advertisements .
- know about the place direct one and some places of interest in Vietnam


<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary: accommodation (n) giant (a) tribe (n)
slope (n) jungle limestone (n)
2. Grammar: none


<b>III.. Teaching aids: </b>


cassette, a route map, pictures of cities
<b>IV. Procedures</b>



<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>


T: Ask questions and call the student who puts
his/her hand up first to answer


- Tell Ss each place consist of 3 questions, 3 points
for the 1st<sub> question, 2 points for the 2</sub>nd<sub> and 1 point for</sub>
the 3rd


<b>B. New lesson</b>
<i>1. Pre-listening</i>


T: set the scene “the Jones family are going around
<i><b>Ha Noi and they are talking about the directions to</b></i>
<i><b>5 places in the map”</b></i>


T puts the map on the broad and asks Ss to identify
the places


<i>2. While-listening</i>


T: Play the tape 2 or 3 times


- tell Ss to work in pairs to compare their answers
T: asks Ss to open their books and look at the picture
on page 108



Set the scene


Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct
Teacher: What’s Mr Quang doing ?


Student; He’s walking/going up the stairs
T: (Miss Lien)


S: (carrying a bag)
T: Nam


S: (standing next to Miss Lien)
T: Ba


S: (sitting under the tree (reading a book)


Quiz: What’s this place ?
*Dalat:


1. It is called the city of Eternal Spring
2. It has a lot of waterfalls and lakes


3. You can find the most kinds of flowers here
*Nha Trang


<b>1.</b>It’s a seaside resort


<b>2.</b>It has a very big monument of Buddha.
<b>3.</b>It has an Oceanic Institute



*Ha Long Bay


1. It is recognized as a World Heritage site by
UNESCO


2. It has a lot of caves


3. It consists of a lot of islands
<b>Answer key</b>
a/ Restaurant


b/ hotel
c/ bus station
d/ pagoda
e/ temple


<b>Language focus 1 </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

T: Lan


S: (standing by the table)


T: Who is the man walking up the stairs ?


T: Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 109 again
and answer the questions


- Elicit the target language by asking the question
below then have Ss repeat



T: explain the form and use of past participle


T: have Ss look at their books , listen to the questions
and answer


Ss: work in pair, asking and answering
<b>C. Consolidation</b>
_ Remark all period aloud.


<b>D. Homework</b>
-Learn words by heart


-Rewrite the advertisements to make them into short
paragraphs, like this


“Nha Trang is a wonderful seaside resort for summer
holidays …


-Do exercises in workbooks


-Prepare: Lesson 4: Read 2 + Focus 4 Monitor and
help Ss with their work


<b>Language focus 2</b>


<b></b> Matching


1.Where is the lamp made in? (China)
2.What color is the box painted? (green)


3.What is the truck recycled from? (cans)
4.What color is the doll dressed in? (pink)
5.What are the flowers wrapped in? (plastic)
6.Where are the toys kept? (in a tray)


“How much is the old lamp made in China?
* Practice


1/ T: How much is the box painted green?
Ss: The box painted green is one dollar
2/ Truck/made from recycled cans/$2
3/ Doll/dressed in red/$ 2


4/ Flowers wrapped in blue papert/$1
5/ Toys kept in cardboard box/ $ 10
* Review


<i>G</i>


<i> ap fill : Present or past participle </i>


<b>Sit break live water sing </b>
Answer key:


1. living 2. watered 3. sitting
4. broken 5. singing


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> WEEK: 25 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 09/ 02 / 2011</b></i>


<i><b> Period : 67 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 10/ 02 / 2011</b></i>
<b>Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM</b>


LESSON 4: Read
<b>I.</b> <b>Objectives: Ss will be able to</b>


<b> Make some suggestions on some tourist sites in Vietnam to foreign tourists </b>
<b>II. Language contents</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

<b> 2. Grammar: none</b>
<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


<b> pictures, 2 posters, gap- fill chart </b>
<b>IV. Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up / </b>
Marks


T divides class into 4 groups


Ask Ss to find 13 hidden words and tell Ss to find out
the most night words will get 2 points


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre-reading


Elicit words from Ss
Ss: repeat and copy down



2. While-reading


Before reading T asks Ss to match the words or
phrases in column A to column B


Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the lines to
connect the words


3. Post-reading


Get Ss open this books road the text on page 105 and
check (v) the boxes


Monitor and correct


Tell Ss to ask and answer questions using the
information in the text


T writes the model on the board


Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice speaking


Revision: Word square
Tourist site


A D D Y R E S O R T


D C A T G B E A C H



K N L R V S A P A E


B U A I M K S A P C


A H T B V B I P J I


C A V E S L D K I T


H L N L A K E C T A


M O U N T A I N R D


A N H A T R A N G E


A G D E F G X C U L


Answer key




Resort, beach, SaPa, caves, lake, mountain Nha
Trang




Bach ma, Ha Long, Da Lat, tribe, seaside
* New words


-mountain-climbing



-sunbathe (v) to lie in the sun to get some sunlight
-florist (n) (what do you call the person who sells
flowers?


Import (v) export


<b></b>What and where


Mountain Florist
Climbing Export
Import
Sunbathe
<b></b>
Matching
A B


1. Nha Trang
2. Da Lat
3. Sapa


4. Ha Long Bay
5. Nha Rong Harbor


a. tribal villages, mountain
climbing


b. the place where president
Ho Chi Minh left VN in
1911



c. swimming and
sunbathing


d. Oceanic Institute
e. flower gardens
Answer key : 1d 2e 3a 4c 5b


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

Monitor and correct


* Focus 4:


T asks Ss to use the right words in the box to fill in
the gaps


Get Ss write the numbers and look at the pictures on
page 110 (16)


Ask Ss to listen to the situation and order the pictures
<b>C. Consolidation</b>


_ Remark all period aloud before class
<b>D. Homework</b>
- Do exercises in workbook, page
-prepare: Lesson 5: Write 1, 2


B: He should go to ( Sapa )
A: Why ?


B: Because (he studies tribes and he likes mountain
climbing)



* Focus 4:


1. Revision: Gap fill


Turned off explain talking ask
1. Would you mind …. me something about it ?
2. Do you mind if I _.___ you a question?
3. Would you please _this new word to me?
4. Would you mind if I____ the television ?
II. Ordering pictures


1. turn off the stereo
2. watch TV while eating
3. sit down


4. postpone the meeting
5. turn on the air-conditioner
6. smoke


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

<b> WEEK: 25 </b> <i><b>Date of preparation: 10/ 02 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 68 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 11/ 02 / 2011</b></i>
<b>Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM</b>


LESSON 5: Write
<b>I. Objectives: </b> <b>Ss will be able to </b>


know how to write a narrative using a guided composition
<b>II. Language contents</b>



1. Vocabulary: canoe, paddle, hire (v) overturn (v) rescue (v)
2. Grammar: none


<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


pictures, gap fill charts, cardboards
<b>IV. Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>
Marks


T: get Ss study the definition of a narrative by a gap fill
Show the chart and asks Ss to fill in the gaps


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre-writing


T: present some new words by using simple English or
pictures


Ss: repeat and cop


T: ask Ss to work in groups to find the right words and
go to the board to write them


Teacher sets the scene “Last week, while on vacation in
<i>Dalat, The Jones family had quite an unforgettable</i>
<i>adventure on Xuan Huong Lake. What did they do and</i>


<i>what happened to them?</i>


2. While-writing


T: Ask Ss to read the fix past of the story and rearrange
the sentences


- Call on some pairs to give their answer and correct


<b>Which word ? </b>


Written climax attention brief events


A narrative is a sequence of (1) these events are
usually (2) in chronological order and often lead
to a (3) . The first sentence of a narrative should
get the reader’s (4) and the ending should be
(5)


Answer key


1. events 2.written 3.climax
4.attention 5.brief


WRITE


I. Pre-teach vocabulary
-canoe (n)


-paddle (v)





paddle (n) (a thing used to paddle)
-hire (v)


-overturn (v)


-rescue (v) (to save somebody’s life from danger)


<b></b> Jumble words


a. cusere b. erhi c.apddled
d. erhi e. ventuader f. erovutrn


Answer key


a. rescue c.paddle e. adventure
b. canoe d. hire f. overturn


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

- Get some Ss read the story aloud


T has Ss look at the pictures on page 106 and 107 and
guess the meaning of new words


Get Ss copy


Ss: look at the pictures again
T: ask Ss to rearrange the events
- Call on Ss to give their answers



Ss: use the pictures already rearranged and write the
story about Uyen


- Monitor and helps Ss with words or structures while
they are writing


T: Ask Ss to notice the past simple tense is often used
in a narrative


Ss work in groups in sub-boards
T corrects and gives marks
3. Post-reading


T: Read aloud the writing
Ss: Read aloud before class.


T: Listen and correct pronunciation.
<b>C. Consolidation</b>
_ Remark all period.


<b>D. Homework</b>
-Write the whole story in your notebooks.
-prepare: Unit 11: Lesson 6 Focus 1, 2


Answer key :
c)  a)  g)  d)  f) b)  e)


<b></b> Matching


stumble vặng lên



go off nhaän ra


realize trượt chân


<b></b> Ordering pictures


d  b  e  h  a  f  c  g
<b></b> Write-it-up


<i>Answer key</i>


Uyen had a day to remember last week
She had a Math exam on Friday but


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

<b> WEEK: 26 </b> <i><b>Date of preparation:15 / 02 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 69 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 16 / 02 / 2011</b></i>


<b>CONSOLIDATION</b>
I. <b>Objectives: </b> Ss will be able to


<b> use present and past participles to describe things and people </b>
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary: none


2. Grammar: Present Participle, Past Participle
<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


pictures, cardboards, gap-fill chart


<b>IV. Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>


<b></b> Memory game


T: Ask Ss to open their books and observe the
pictures on page 109 carefully


- Let Ss look at the pictures for 20” and ask them to
close their books


- Divide class into two teams and ask each team to
go to the board and write from memory the names
of the things they’ve just seen in the picture


<b>B. New lesson</b>


T: asks Ss to open their books and look at the
picture on page 108


Set the scene


Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct
- Elicit the target language by asking the question
below then have Ss repeat


T: Have Ss copy



-Show the cardboards and have Ss run through the
situation again


Ss: say the sentences


Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the
pictures on page 109 to do the matching


T: Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 109 again
and answer the questions


- Elicit the target language by asking the question
below then have Ss repeat


T: explain the form and use of past participle


T: have Ss look at their books , listen to the
questions and answer


Ss: work in pair, asking and answering


<b></b><sub> Memory game</sub>


Answer key: box, lamp. Truck, doll, flowers,
elephant, bear, rabbit


<b>Model sentence</b>


The man/walking up the stairs/ is Mr Quang (Present


participle phrase)


Form: Verb + ing Present Participle


Use: A present participle (phrase) can be used as an
adj to qualify a noun with native meaning


<b></b> Model sentences


The old lamp/made in China/ is five dollars


(past participle phrase)
Form: Regular verb +ed -> Past Participle
Irregular verbcolumn 3


Use: A Past participle (phrase) can be used as an
adjective to qualify a noun with passive meaning
* Practice


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

<b>C. Consolidation</b>


T: Ask Ss to use the right form of the verbs in the
box to fill in the gaps


Ss: Try to do
T: Correct again


<b>D. Homework</b>
- Learn by heart the structures
- Do exercises 4,9 in workbook



- Review the structures from unit 9 to unit 11


4/ Flowers wrapped in blue papert/$1
5/ Toys kept in cardboard box/ $ 10
* Review


<i>G</i>


<i> ap fill : Present or past participle </i>


<b>Sit break live water sing </b>
1. The gir l___ at 50 Tran Hung Dao is my friends
2. The garden _____ every morning is full of flowers
3. That cat ____ on the table is hers


The vase ____ yesterday is my father’s favorite one
4. The woman ___ on the stage is my neighbor


Answer key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<i><b>WEEK: 26 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 16/ 02 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 70 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 17/ 02 / 2011</b></i>


FOURTY-FIVE MINUTES TEST


<b>I. Choose the suitable words or phrases to fill in the blanks</b>


<b> she is is she Don’t for</b> <b> last </b>



<b> </b>


<b> Do recycled broken</b> <b> when</b> <b> while</b>




1. ____________you mind if I smoke?
2. Can you tell me where_____________?


3. Milk bottles can be _______________after being cleaned
4. She has been in Ha Noi__________________two months


5. I was reading__________________my sisters were playing with dolls.
<b>III.Match the questions in column A with the suitable answers in column B</b>


A B


1. How much is this parcel?
2. When did you meet her?


3. Would you mind if I took a photo?
4. Who lives with her?


5. Why didn’t you go to class yesterday?


a. Last week.
b. Her sister.


c. Because I was ill.
d. Please do.



e. It’s 20.000 dong.
1-____, 2-____, 3-____, 4-_____,5-____


<b>III. Rewrite the sentences</b>


<b>1.</b> dangerous / river/ swim /this /it/ in /is/ to.
………


<b>2.</b> ago/was / house / more /this / 50 years /built/.
………


<b>3.</b> Which/ belong /group / to / clothes/ do / ?
………


<b>4.</b> you / I / Do / if / mind / close / the door / ?. ………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

1. Tom doesn’t enjoy__________(laugh) at by other people.
2. This is the first time he __________(meet) Hoa’s family.
3. The doorbell rang while Tom___________(watch) television.
4. Where_____he______ (live) in 1999?




<b>V.Read this passage carefully, then answer the following questions.</b>


Yesterday, when I was riding along a busy street, I saw an accident. A woman was knocked down
when she crossed the street at a zebra crossing. Many people stopped to offer their help. A policeman
arrived and asked a young man to telephone for ambulance. While waiting for the ambulance, the
policeman and some people tried to stop the bleeding. They used a handkerchief to cover the wound,


then put pressure on it and held it tight. They tried to talk her in order to keep her awake. After about
ten minutes, the ambulance arrived and the woman was taken to the hospital.


1.When did the accident happen?


………
2.Who telephoned for an ambulance?
………


3.What did they try to talk her for? ………
4. How long did the ambulance arrive?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

<i><b>WEEK: 26 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation:17 / 02 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 71 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 18/ 02 / 2011</b></i>


<b>TEST - CORRECTION </b>


* Objective: Ss can know their mistakes that they’ve done and practice exercises.
A. Key answer:


I. Choose the suitable words or phrases to fill in the blanks


<b> she is is she Don’t for</b> <b> last </b>


<b> </b>


<b> Do recycled broken</b> <b> when</b> <b> while</b>





1. _____Do_______you mind if I smoke?
2. Can you tell me where___she is__________?


3. Milk bottles can be _____recycled__________after being cleaned
4. She has been in Ha Noi_______for___________two months


5. I was reading_______while___________my sisters were playing with dolls.
<b>III.Match the questions in column A with the suitable answers in column B</b>


A B


1. How much is this parcel?
2. When did you meet her?


3. Would you mind if I took a photo?
4. Who lives with her?


5. Why didn’t you go to class yesterday?


a. Last week.
b. Her sister.
c. Because I was ill.
d. Please do.
e. It’s 20.000 dong.


1-__e__, 2-__a__, 3-__d__, 4-__b___,5-__c__
<b>III. Rewrite the sentences</b>


<b>5.</b> dangerous / river/ swim /this /it/ in /is/ to.
It is dangerous to swim in this river…



<b>6.</b> ago/was / house / more /this / 50 years /built/.
This house was built more 50 years ago


<b>7.</b> Which/ belong /group / to / clothes/ do / ?
Which group do clothes belong to?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<b>IV.</b> <b>Give the correct forms of the verbs in the blanks.</b>


5. Tom doesn’t enjoy__laughing________(laugh) at by other people.
6. This is the first time he __has met________(meet) Hoa’s family.


7. The doorbell rang while Tom____was watch_______(watch) television.
8. Where__did___he__live____ (live) in 1999?




<b>V.Read this passage carefully, then answer the following questions.</b>


Yesterday, when I was riding along a busy street, I saw an accident. A woman was knocked down
when she crossed the street at a zebra crossing. Many people stopped to offer their help. A policeman
arrived and asked a young man to telephone for ambulance. While waiting for the ambulance, the
policeman and some people tried to stop the bleeding. They used a handkerchief to cover the wound,
then put pressure on it and held it tight. They tried to talk her in order to keep her awake. After about
ten minutes, the ambulance arrived and the woman was taken to the hospital.


1.When did the accident happen?
The accident happened yesterday
2.Who telephoned for an ambulance?
A young man telephoned for ambulance


3.What did they try to talk her for?


They tried to talk her in order to keep her awake …
4. How long did the ambulance arrive?


After about ten minutes, the ambulance arrived.


<i><b>WEEK: 27 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation:22 / 02 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 72 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 23/ 02 / 2011</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<b>I.</b> <b>Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to</b>


<b> aware of how to mark, accept and decline invitations </b>
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary: include (v), come over (v), pick (somebody) up (v)
abroad (adv)


2. Grammar: Progressive tense with “always”
<b>III. Techniques: </b>


Guessing game, charting, rub out and remember
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>


cassette, pictures
<b>V.</b> <b>Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>



<b></b> Getting started


1-Guessing game:


T: Show the photocopied pictures to Ss: one by
one, and ask Ss to guess what country it is?
T: ask Ss if they know what 3 first pictures are
2- Chatting


Ss tell their partners which country they would
like to visit and why?


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Presentation:


T: Set situation and present some new words
- Practice them in chorus, individual


Ss : Copy down ,repeat and practice


T: Listen and correct pronunciation. Then ask ss
to practice read dialogue.


Ss: Listen and play the role and read aloud before
class.


T: present grammar and checks voc
Ss: Listen and copy down.



2. Practice


T: Put the chart on the board and ask ss to read
the statements


Ss: work in pairs to decide if the statements are T
or F


- Ss open their books, listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue on page 112


- Ss work in pairs


Call on some Ss to give their keys


<b>1. Getting started</b>
Answer key


a/ The USA b/ Australia
c/ Thailand d/ Britain


e/ Canada f/ Japan


a/ Statue of Liberty
b/ The Opera House
c/ …


A: Which country do you want to visit?
B: I’d like to visit Australia



A: Why ?


B: B/c Australian people are friendly
2. Listen and read


-include (v) ( translation)


-come over (v): (to come to someone’s house to visit for a
short time)


-pick s.b up; (to come and get someone in your car to drive
him/her to a place)


-aboard (adv)-in a foreign country
Model: Progressive tense with “Always”
+He’s always working


Ÿ Rub out and remember (voc)
*True/False Perditions:


1/ Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in San
Francisco


2/ Mrs Smith invites Mrs Quyen and her husband to say
with her while they are in town .


3/ Mrs Quyen doesn’t accept Mrs Smith’s invitation b/c she
wants to stay with a Vietnamese friend of hers


4/ Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the USA for 3


days


5/ Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs
Smith’s place for dinner one night


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

T correct


T: Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete Mrs
Quyen’s schedule with the information taken
from the dialogue


- Tell Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out
the statements indicating the following situations
Ss: Try to answer the question on page 113
Give feedback and correct


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


T: Check comprehension by answering the
questions.


Ss: Listen and try to do.
T: Correct mistakes again


<b>D. Homework</b>
-Learn new words by heart
-Do exercise in workbooks
-Prepare Lesson 2 Speak


* Practice Answer key



1-F " Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from Hanoi
2-T


3-F " b/c her accommodation is included in her ticket price
4-T


5-F " Only, Mrs Quyen will come over to Mrs Smith’s
6-T


*Complete Mrs Quyen’s schedule: (Read 1)


Date Mon


25 Tue 26 Wed 27 Thur 28


Sched


ule SanFranc
isco


Going


out Havingdinner with
the Smiths


Leaving San
Francisco
*Grammar Awareness:



1-Making an invitation


"”Would you like to come and stay … ?”
2-Accepting an invitation


"”Yes, we’d love … “
3-Declining an invitation


"”That’s very kind of you …”
4-Making a complaint


" “Oh dear. He’s always working”
* Comprehension questions (Read 2)


Answer key:


a/ No, they won’t. B/c they are coming on a tour, and their
accommodation is included in the ticket price, so they will
stay at the hotel


b/ No, he won’t. B/c he will have a business meeting in the
evening that day.


c/ Mrs Smith will pick her up at the hotel
<i><b>WEEK: 27 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 23/ 02 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 73 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 24/ 02 / 2011</b></i>


<b>Unit 12 : A VACATION ABROAD</b>
<b> Lesson 2: Speak & Language focus 3</b>
<b>I. Objectives: </b>



<b>_ By the end of the lesson, Ss be able to talk about their plans for a trip aboard </b>
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary: itinerary, gallery, flight, via, facilities, brochure, gym
2. Grammar: simple present


<b>III. Techniques: </b>


_ Slap the board, Matching, mapped dialogue, Quiz
<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>


_ cardboard, a mapped dialogue chart, sub-board.
<b>V. Procedures</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

<b>A. Warm up</b>


T: Tell Ss who can answer the questions
will get 1 or 2 good marks


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre-speaking


T: present some new words and practice
them


T: check voc by holding class to play
“what and where” game


- Show the photocopied tables (p 113,


114) on the right of the board


- Randomly and ask Ss to match them
with the right titles on the left


T: ask Ss some question for information about
the flights, accommodation, and tourist places
2. While - speaking


T: call some pairs to practice each
exchange before going on to another
exchange


Ss: Listen and try to speak aloud.


T: Control whole class and correct their
mistakes


3 . Post – speaking


T: write the mapped dialogue on the board
- call some pairs to practice each


exchange before going on to another
exchange


Ss: Listen and do


<b>C. Consolidation</b>



T: Remark and ask Ss to make a plan for
their coming summer holiday by filling


* Quiz


1/ What’s the end of everything?




( letter g)


2/ What word starts with T, ends with T, and is full of T?




(Teapot ; Pot full of )


3/ What’s in the middle of New York City ?




York


4/ Which river in America has 4 eyes ?
-> Mississippi : four eyes


<b>Speak</b>


1. New words



-itinerary (n)/aI`tIn <i>∂</i> rerI/: (translation) lộ trình
-brochure (n): tờ quảng cáo, giới thiệu về du lịch
-gym (n)(translation) phòng tập thể dục


-via (prep): through a place
* What and where/Slap the board


<b></b> Matching


1- Itinerary


2- Flight information
3- Hotel advertisement
4- Travel brochure
Suggestions:


* For the flight information table:


+How many flights a week can you take from Los Angeles to
Boston ?


+Which flight can you take everyday of the week ?
* For the Hotel advertisement table:


+Which of the hotel is cheaper ?


+ How much is a double room in Revere Hotel ? How about
the Atlantic Hotel ?


* For the Travel brochure:


+ Where can you visit ?
* Mapped dialogue:
Set the scene:


“These people are making a plan for their trip from Los
Angeles to Boston. Let’s do it with them!”


Where shall we stay?
Where should we visit?


What time should we leave
Los Angeles?


The Revere Hotel is
expensive but it has a gym
I think we should visit
Harvard Medical school, the
Museum and Arts Gallery
There’s a daily flight at 10
a.m , Would that be OK ?
Ex:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

the information in their itinerary
Ss: Listen and try to do


<b>D. Homework</b>
<b>-Learn voc</b>


-Do exercises in the workbook
-prepare next period: Listen



Arrive (HCM City) _________
Accommodation _________
Sightseeing __________
Depart (HCM City) __________


Focus 3:


Bao is always forgetting his homework
Form: is/am/are + always + V-ing
Use: To express a complaint


Answer key:


b/ Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella
c/ Mr and Mrs Thanh are always missing the bus
d/ Nam is always watching TV


Eg:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

<i><b>WEEK: 27 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 24/ 02 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 74 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 25/ 02 / 2011</b></i>


<b>Unit 12 : A VACATION ABROAD</b>
<b> Lesson 3 : LISTEN & LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2</b>
<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson ss can be able to </b>


_ Practice in listening to the weather forecast for information
about the weather in big cities in the world



<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary: minus (a), humid (a)
2. Grammar:


<b>III. Techniques: </b>


Chain game, brainstorm, chatting
<b>IV. Teaching aids:</b>


cassette, chart (gap fill)
<b>VI. Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher and SS’ activities</b> <b>Contents </b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>


T: Get Ss, one by one says out a word until they
make a meaningful sentence. At the end, ask the
whole group to repeat the sentence.


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre – listening


T: write the topic on the board


Ask Ss to find the words related to the topic
present new words; Collect Ss words and write
them on the board



Ss: Look and copy down


T: Go through the meaning of the words and
have Ss copy


Ask Ss some Ss to lead in the lesson
Put the gap fill table on the board


Ss listen to the weather forecast about cities in
the table and have to fill in the gaps with the
information they hear


2. While - listening


T: Let ss listen to the tape 3 times and complete
the table.


Ss: Listen and try to complete.
* Tape transcript:


* Chain game:
S1: I


S2: went
S3: shopping
S4: and
S5: bought
S6: a lot of
S7: things
I- Brainstorm:



Humid (new word)
humidity (n)


Possible answer:


Cloudy, cool, cold, warm, hot, dry, fine, humid, rainy,
snowy, sunny, wet, windy, stormy, degree, minus,
centigrade,…


* Chatting - Suggestions:


a/ Have you ever listened to the weather forecast on TV
or on the radio?


b/ What does it often tell you about?
( - Weather & temperature)


c/ Do you think it’s necessary to listen to the weather
forecast? Why/why not?


Words relates to the


weather forecast Minus


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

And here is today’s weather forecast foe the
international traveler.


1.Let’s start with Sydney. It’ll be a day in
today, and windy. For the temperature, the low


will be twenty and the high will be twenty six
degrees.


2. Tokyo will be dry and windy, with a low of
fifteen and a high of twenty two.


3. London is going to have a humid day. It will
be very cold with a low of minus three and a
high of seven.


4. Bangkok will be warm and dry, with a low
of twenty-four degrees centigrade and a high of
twenty-two.


5. New York is going to have a windy day. It
will be cloudy with a low of eight and a high of
fifteen.


6. In Paris it will be cool and dry today. The
low will be ten degrees and the high will be
sixteen.


3. Post - listening


T: Guide ss “ ask and answer”
Ss: Look and try to do


T: Control and correct mistakes again.
<b>C. Consolidation</b>



_ Remark all period before class and ask ss
some questions.


Ss: Try to answer


<b>D. Homework</b>


- Write- it- up: Use the information in the table to
write a weather report, beginning with: “Here is
today’s weather forecast for the international travelers


In Sydney, it’ll be _______
-Learn voc


-Prepare Lesson 4 Read 1, 2+Focus 1


d/ What do you know about the high and the low
temperature ?


(It refers to the lowest and highest temperature degree in
a day)


<i><b>Answer keys</b></i>



Temperature


City Weather Low High


1
2


3
4
5
6
Sydney
Tokyo
London
Bangkok
New
York
Paris
….dry….;….windy…..
….dry…..;…..
windy……
…humid;…cold…..
… warm;….dry…….
…windy;
..cloudy…
….cool…;….dry …..
…20…
…15…
..-3..
…24…
…3…
…10…
…26…
…22…
…7….
32
…15…

…16….


Ex: What’s the weather like in Sydney today?




It’ll be dry and windy
How about the temperature ?




The low will be 20 and the high 26 degrees
1. What’s the weather like in BMT?


2. What weather do you like?
3. Do you like cold weather?


* Focus 1:


a/ Ba was taking a shower at 8 o’clock last night
b/ Hoa was having dinner at ______


c/ Bao was studying at _______
d/ Nga was writing a letter at _____
e/ Na was walking with her dog at _____


f/ Lan was talking to her grandmother at eight o’clock last
night


<i><b>Focus 2:</b></i>


Matching:


a/ C b/ F c/ E d/ B e/ D f/ A


1/ What was the Le family doing when the mailman
came


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<i><b>WEEK: 28 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 25/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 75 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 26/ 01 / 2011</b></i>


<b>Unit 12 : A VACATION ABROAD</b>
<b> Lesson 3: READ</b>
<b>I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to</b>


obtain some knowledge about some scenic sports in the USA
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary: volcano (a), lava (n), pour out (v), carve (v)
be situated (v), overhead (adv)


2. Grammar: Past progressive tense
<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


postcards, cardboards, pictures, drawing
<b>V.</b> <b>Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>
T: hold Ss to play the game


Ss: Look , listen and play
T: Control and remark.


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre – reading


T: Set situation and give out some new words
then practice them,


Ss: Listen and copy down then practice in
chorus and independent .


T: check voc by matching game then
presents grammar


- Explain the usage of the past progressive
tense


_ Ss to copy the grid in their notebooks


T asks Ss to read the postcards from Mrs Quyen
to her children and fill in the gaps with the
information taken from them


Give feedback & correct


2. While - reading


<b></b> Pelmanism Adj-Noun



Adjectives Noun
humid humidity


warm warmth


windy wind


cloudy cloud
READ


New words


-volcano (n): ( Picture) núi lửa


-lava (n): (translation) dung nham, nham thạch
-pour out (v)( Action) đổ ra


-carve (v)( picture) tạc, chạm khắc
-be situated (translation) tọa laïc


-overhead (adv): ( action) ở trên cao


<b></b> Matching: English – Vietnamese
<b></b> Model sentence: Past progressive


S + Was / Were + V-ing


Ex: The lava was pouring out when we flew overhead
* The usage:



a/ The action happened at a certain time in the past
b/ The action happened and lasted at a point of time in
the past


c/ The action was happening in the past and another
one happened


d/ Two actions happened at the same time in the past


<b></b> Grid


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

T: Show the cardboard and go through the verbs
(page 119)


_ Ask Ss to look at the Qs on p
upload.123doc.net and answer the questions to
check the content of the lesson


3. Post - reading


T: hand sub- board on the boad and have ss
change these answers for another ss and check.
Ss: Do as directed and practice in pairs ask and
answer.


T: Control and correct mistakes.


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


T: Remark all period and have ss practice


language focus 1.


Ss: Listen and try to do.
T: Correct mistakes again


<b>D. Homework</b>


- Learn words and do exercise 6,7 in workbook
-Prepare Lesson 5 Write


b. New York
c. Chicago
d. Mount Rushmore


e. San Francisco


Volcano


Went shopping and bought lots of
souvenirs


saw Lake Michigan


Saw the heads of four American
presidents carved into the rock
visited Fisherman’s Wharf, the Napa


valley, wine growing area and the
Alcatraz Prison



Answer key:


a/ She went there by plane


b/ She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz
c/ On Mount Rushmore, there are heads of for


American presidents carved into rock
d/ It’s “The Windy City”


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<i><b>WEEK: 28 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 25/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 76 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 26/ 01 / 2011</b></i>


<b>Unit 12 : A VACATION ABROAD</b>
<b> Lesson 5 : WRITE </b>


<b>I.</b>


<b> Objectives : _ By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to </b>
<b> write postcards to their friends about their trip </b>
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary:


2. Grammar: Past progressive tense with always.
<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


chat and sub-board.
<b>VI. Procedures</b>



<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>
T: ask Ss some questions
Ss: Try to answer


T: remark and give Ss marks
<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre – writing


T: Ask Ss to look at the postcard on p118
and complete the gaps with the appropriate
words


- Call on some Ss to go to the board &
write the words they guess


Ss: Try to do


T: Give feedback and correct


T: Write the topic on the board and Ask Ss
to read the postcard (write 1) again and fill
in the gaps with the sentences showing the
information on the left


Ss: work in groups


2. While - writing



T: Guide Ss to write the postcards on a


<i><b>Questions: </b></i>


1/Where did Mrs Quyen & her husband spend their
holiday? (In the USA)


2/What did they see on Mount Rushmore? (The heads of


4 American Presidents carved into the rock)


3/ Who did they visit when they were in the USA? (The


Smiths)
<b>Write</b>


a/ Gap-fill:
Answer key;


1/ in 2/ people 3/ weather
4/ visited 5/ her 6/nice/lovely
7/ bought 8/ for 9/ heaviness
10/ soon


b/


-Information needed to write a postcard
<i><b>Answer key:</b></i>


Necessary information for a postcard



Place We’re having a wonderful time
in the USA


How you feel about
the people?


The people are friendly


Weather The weather has been warm &
sunny


Who you meet/visit In San Francisco, I visited
my friend, Sandra Smith)
What you see No information


What you buy I bought lots of souvenirs


<b></b> Set the scene:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

piece of paper (to be collected if necessary)
Ss: work Individually


3. Post - writing


T: ask Ss to practice Focus 2


Ss: write full sentences by answering the
following questions



-Elicit the model from Ss, using
Vietnamese


-Have Ss repeat and write the sentence on
the board


T: Ask Ss to practice Focus 3 chorally


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


T: Call some Ss to the front of the class and
ask them to talk about their friends (using
progress tense with “Always”)


Let Ss make sentences with “while” or
“when” (using past simple and past
progressive )


<b>D. Homework</b>
-Learn by heart the grammar points
- Redo exercise Focus 2, 3


city in VN. Write a postcard to a friend about your trip,
using the information in the grid


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

<i><b>WEEK: 28 </b></i> <i><b>Date of preparation: 25/ 01 / 2011</b></i>
<i><b> Period : 76 </b></i> <i><b> Date of teaching: 26/ 01 / 2011</b></i>


<b>Unit 13 : FESTIVALS</b>



Lesson 1 : Getting stated & Listen and read


<b>I.</b> <b>Objectives : By the end of the lesson SS will be able to </b>
<b> Ask for explanations of events</b>
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Vocabulary : fetch (v), yell (v), urge (v), rub (v),
participate in = take part in , award (v)…


<i> 2..Grammar : </i>


Compound words
<b>III. Teaching aids : </b>


stereo, pictures, sub-board.
<b>VII. Procedures : </b>


<b>Teacher ‘s and ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>
T: write the names on the board


-Tell Ss these people are going to go on their
visits to Vietnam and they need advice on where
to go


Introduce the names, one by one
<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Presentation



T: Set situation and present some new words then
practice them


Ss: Listen and copy down and practice them in
chorus , individual.


T: Listen and correct pronunciation.


T: present model sentence
Ss: Listen and copy down.
T checks voc


T sets the scene : “ Ba invites his friend Liz to a
<i><b>traditional festival in the North of Vietnam. Do</b></i>
<i><b>you know what kind of festival it is ?”</b></i>


( It is the rice- cooking festival )


I. Getting stared
<i>Chatting</i>


Tom, David, Huckleberry, Oliver, Robinson
1. Tom likes swimming and sunbathing.
+ Where should he go ? .... Why ?


2. David is interested in ancient cities -> ?
3. Huckleberry likes mountain- climbing-> ?
4. Oliver is keen on pottery -> ?


5. Robinson is fond of crowded places -> ?


II. Listen and read


1. New words


- festival(n) ( explanation)


- fetch (v) : to go to get (sth) and bring it back
- yell (v) : to shout loudly


- urge (v): make a person / an animal move more
quickly


-teammate(n): (explanation)
- participate in -> participation (n)
- competition(n): (explanation)
- award (v)


- husk ( n) : (explanation)


(He is the winner of the competition . They award
him the first prize )


<i><b>Model sentence</b></i>


There are three competitions :
+ water-fetching,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

T: ask ss to guess what they are going to read by
asking questions



2. Practice


T: Have Ss open their books, read the dialogue
listen to the tape


- Ask Ss to read the statements and check the
boxes , using the information in the dialogue
Ss: Listen and work in pairs and correct the false
sentences


T: Use sub-board and correct again.
<b>C. Consolidation</b>
T: Remark all period aloud before class.
Ss: Listen carefully.


<b>D. Homework</b>
-Learn new words , do exercises again
- Do exercise 3 in workbook


-Prepare Lesson 2 Speak + Listen


**What and where


<b>Suggestions</b>


How many competitions do people enter in a
rice-cooking festival ?


In water- fetching festival competition , what do
people do ?



<i>True or false</i>
<i><b>Answer keys</b></i>


a. F -> Only one team member takes...
b. F -> One water bottle


c. T


d. F -> ... of bamboo are used
e. F -> The judges taste


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

<b>WEEK: 27</b> Date of preparation: 15 / 3 / 08


Period : 79 Date of teaching: 17 / 3/ 08


<b>Unit 13 : FESTIVALS</b>
Lesson 2: Speak + Listen
I. Objectives:


- At the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about their preparation for a special event
II. Language contents


1. Vocabulary:


- Pomegranate(n)peach blossoms (n) ,Marigolds (n), dried, watermelon, seeds , Spring rolls
2. Grammar : none


III. Techniques : What and where, Grid
IV. Teaching aids : chart , stereo, sub-board.


V. Procedures:


Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Contents


A. Warm up


T: ask Ss to think of 5 things they often prepare for
Tet


Ss: write them on the board
T: remark and give marks to Ss
B. New lesson


1. Pre-speaking


T: Set situation and present some new words then
practice them.


Ss: Listen , copy down and then practice them in
chorus , individual.


Ss: join the game


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue on page 123 and put the
sentences in correct order


Ss: work in pairs


- Call some pairs to give their answers
2. While- speaking



T: put the chart with the cues on the board
- Elicit the exchanges from Ss


Ss: work in pairs


T: call some pairs to practice each exchange before
going on to another exchange


3. Post-speaking


T: Ask Ss one of the festival (page123) and make up
their own dialogues


Ss: work in pairs


Then T calls on some pairs to demonstrate their
dialogues before class


* Find things in common
Decorate the room/yard


Paint the house
Buy cakes buy new dress
Send New Year cards to friends
<b>Speak 1</b>


* New words


- Pomegranate(n) quả lựu


- Peach blossom (n) quả đào
- Marigolds (n) cúc vạn thọ
- Dried watermelon seeds : hạt dưa
- Spring rolls (n) : chả giò


* What and where
II. Ordering
<i>Answer keys</i>
A-> F
B-> G
C-> H
D-> J
E-> I
<i><b>Mapped dialogue</b></i>


Mrs Quyen Lan


A: You/ tidied/
bedroom ?


B. market/have
to/oranges
/pomegranates
C. Sure/ will


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

1. Pre-listening


T sets the scene” The Robinson family is making
<i><b>preparations for Tet. They want to buy things to</b></i>
<i><b>make it a traditional festival as Vietnamese people</b></i>


<i><b>do”</b></i>


2. While-listening


T: Ask Ss to open their books and read the statements
on page 124


Ss: predict the words in the gaps
Play the tape (2 or 3 times )
Tape transcript:


<b>Mrs. Robinson: John, I want you to go to the</b>
<b>flower market for me, please?</b>


<b>Mr. Ro..: What do you have to buy?</b>


<b>Mrs Ro….: Some peach blossoms and a bunch of</b>
<b>flowers.</b>


<b>Mr Ro…: What sort of flowers?</b>


<b>Mrs Ro..: Marigolds, because they are traditional</b>
<b>at tet.</b>


<b>Mr. Ro….: Anything else?</b>


<b>Mrs, ro….: No, but I need Liz to do a few things.</b>
<b>Liz: What is that Mom?</b>


<b>Mrs. Ro…: Are you busy?</b>



<b>Liz: No, Do you need something?</b>


<b>Mrs. Ro…: Yes, Go to the market and pick up</b>
<b>some candies and one packet of dried watermelon</b>
<b>seeds , please.</b>


<b>Liz: Okay. What are you going to do ?</b>


<b>Mrs. Ro..: I’m going to Mrs. Nga’s. She going to</b>
<b>show me how to make spring rolls</b>


3. Post-listening:


Ask Ss to copy the grid( Page124) and fill in the gaps
with the information taken from the statements above
Call on some students to give their answers


C. Consolidation


_ Remark all period aloud.
D. Homework


-Learn new words


- Do exercises in workbook
- prepare Lesson 3 Read


D. not really/ but/
want house/look


nice/festival


E. That/very good.
Bye


out ?


4.Mom/I/what/do
now/will/clean glass
windows


5.Bye
<b>Speak 2</b>


A village festival A flower
festival


A school festival A harvest
festival


A spring festival
<i><b>Listen </b></i>


Gap-fill prediction
Answer keys


a. Mr Robinson/ Flower market
b. Traditional


c. Dried watermelon seeds


d. Make spring rolls
<i>Things to do</i>


Mr Robinson Go to the flower market to buy
peach blossom and a bunch of
marigolds


Mrs
Robinson


Go to Mrs Nga’s to learn how to
make spring rolls


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<b>WEEK: 27</b> Date of preparation: 16 / 3 / 08


Period : 80 Date of teaching: 18 / 3/ 08


<b>Unit 12 : FESTIVALS</b>
Lesson 3: Read


I. Objectives : At the end of the lesson Ss will able to get some knowledge about Christmas
II. Language contents


1. Vocabulary : spread (v) Christmas carol (n) patron saint (n) jolly (a)
2. Grammar : none


III. Techniques : Sing a song , Jumbled words, Matching


IV. Teaching aids : pictures, cardboards, poster, stereo, sub-board.
<b>V. Procedures</b>



<i><b>Teacher’s and Ss ‘ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


A. Warm up


T: teach Ss an English Christmas song
Ask Ss to listen to the tape and sing along


B. New lesson
1. Pre- reading


T: Set situation and present some new words
then practice them.


Ss: Listen , copy down and then practice them
in chorus , individual.


T checks voc by holding class to play “
Jumbled words “


2. While- reading


T: Ask Ss to open their books and read the
paragraphs on page 124/125


-Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it
- Ask SS to read the paragraph again and
complete the grid


- Give feedback and correct



3. Post- reading


T: Ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss work in pairs


T corrects and gives answers
C. Consolidation


_ Remark all period aloud before class .


* Sing a song


EX: Silent night. I wish you a merry Christmas
<b>Read</b>


* New words


Spread (v) : To cover a larger and larger area
Spread / spread / spread


Christmas carol (n)


(Silent night is a Christmas carol )
Patron saint (n)


Jolly(a) : happy and cheerful
<i><b>**** Jumbled word</b></i>


Answer keys


Christmas
specials


Places of origin Date
The Christmas


tree


Riga Early 1500s


The Christmas
Cards


England Mid-19th
century
Christmas


Carol No information 800 years ago


Santa Claus USA 1823


<i>Answer keys</i>


a. more than two centuries ago


b. Because he wants to send Christmas greetings to his
friends


c. 800 years ago



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

D. Homework


-Rewrite the answers in their notebooks
- Learn the words


- Write it up : Use the information in the grid
To write the brief paragraphs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

<b>WEEK: 27</b> Date of preparation: 17 / 3 / 08


Period : 81 Date of teaching:20 / 3/ 08


<b>Unit 12 : FESTIVALS</b>
Lesson 4 : Write + L.F 3


I. Objectives : At the end of the lesson Ss can be able to practice in writing a report on a festival they have
joined


II. Language contents :
1. Vocabulary : none
2. Grammar : none


III. Techniques : Memory game , ask and answer , Gap fill
IV. Teaching aids : photocopied, picture (p126) , chart, su-board.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Contents


A. Warm up



T: show the photocopied picture to Ss and ask them to
observe it carefully


- Let Ss look at the picture for about 20’’ then put it
away


T: ask Ss to listen to the questions
S: Try to answer


T: put the picture on the board again
- Give feedback and correct


B. New lesson
1. Pre- writing


T: Ask ss to write 9 numbers on the board from 1 to 9
- Tell Ss each number is for a question but 3 of them
are lucky numbers


If Ss choose a lucky number, they don’t have to
answer any questions. Divide the class into 2 teams
2. While-writing


T: ask Ss to use the information in the dialogue on
page 121 to fill in the gaps in the report on page 127
Ss: work in pairs


T: correct and remarks
3. Post-writing



T: Ask Ss to write a similar report on a festival
They’ve joined recently


Ss: look at the questions and practice speaking first
by answering the questions from a->g


T: have Ss connect the sentences to make it a report
- Monitor and help Ss with their work and call on


<i><b>Memory game</b></i>


1/ How many people are there in the picture ? What are
they doing ?


2/Name all the things in the picture
<i>Answer keys</i>


1/ They are participating in the rice-cooking competition
2. rice , basket, pans, bamboo sticks, paper fans ,
chopsticks, a flag


<b>Write</b>


*** Lucky numbers


1.What do you call the festival where people have to
cook rice ?


(the rice-cooking festival )



2.How many competitions are there in the rice-cooking
festival ? What are they ?


(water-fetching, fire- making and rice- cooking )
3. Lucky number


4.What do people use to fetch water ? (bottles)
5.Lucky number


6.Do they use pieces of wood to make fire?
( No, pieces of bamboo)


7.What do people have to do before they cook the rice ?
(separate the rice from the husk)


8.Lucky number


9.How many people are there altogether in a team taking
part in the rice-cooking festival ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

some Ss to read their reports aloud.


C. Consolidation


T: Explain the compound words and practice writing
Ss: Listen and try to write.


-Ask Ss to do exercise on page 130 and write their
answers on the posters



Ss: work in pairs / groups
D. Homework


-Write your report in your notebooks


-Do exercises in workbook and prepare Focus1,2,4


Gap-fill
<i>Answer key</i>


1. rice-cooking 6.traditional
2.one/a 7.bamboo
3.water- fetching 8.six
4.run 9.separate
5.water 10.added
*** Focus 3


<i>Answer keys</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<b>WEEK: 28</b> Date of preparation: 21 / 3 / 08


Period : 82 Date of teaching: 25 / 3/ 08


<b>Unit 12 : FESTIVALS</b>
Lesson 5 Focus 1,2,4
I. Objectives:


Ss will be able to use reported speech and the passive in the past, present and future tense
II. Language contents



1. Vocabulary : jumble (v) scatter (v) jar(n) pull(v)
2. Grammar : Passive form , reported speech


III. Techniques : Matching, gap fill, transformation drill
IV. Teaching aids : cardboards, char, sub-board.


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<i><b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


A. Warm up


T: prepare 11 cardboards, numbered from 1
to 11 on one side and the words on the other
side


- Divide the class into 2 teams and ask each
team to choose 2 numbers, one in the first
row . If the words in both cards match in
sequence of an infinitive with its past
participle, this team will get a point


B. New lesson
1. Presentation


T: Ask Ss to match the words in column A
with the forms in column B


Ss: Try to work in pairs



T: Call SS to give their answers and correct
their mistakes


T: Ask Ss to look at Focus 1 on page 28
Have Ss fill in the gaps with the right form
of the verbs in the box


Ss: work in pairs


T: Call on some Ss to write their
answers( only the verb forms) and then
correct again.


2. Practice


T: present new words and practice them.
Ss: Copy down and repeat and say the
meaning


T: Ask Ss to look at Focus 2 on page
128/129 and fill in the gaps with the right
form of the verbs in the box


Correcting


* Pelmanism


<b>Infinitive</b> <b>Past participle</b>
Put
Write


Hold
Make
Break
Put
Written
Held
Made
Broken
* Language focus 1


<i> Matching</i>


The passive form


A B
Tenses Form
1.Present simple
2.Past simple
3.Future simple
4.Present perfect


a. was/were+ V(pp)
b. have/has been + V(pp)
c. Is/ am/are + V (past
participle)


d. will/shall + be + V(pp)
<i>Answer key</i>


1c 2a 3d 4b


Gap fill


<i><b>Answer key</b></i>
a. were performed
b. was decorated
c. is made
d. will be held
e. was awarded
f. was written


** Language focus 2 (10’)
1/Pre-teach voc


jumble(v)


scatter (v) to throw things everywhere on the ground
jar(n) (drawing, realia)


pull(v)
<b>*Gap- fill</b>
<i>Answer key</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

T: set the scene


- Then write the quoted speech on the board
T: explain and ask Ss to pay attention to the
changes


Ss: Look carefully and copy down.



T: Ask Ss to look at Focus 4 on page 130
and do the exercise


Ss: Listen and do as directed.
T: Control and correct mistakes.


C. Consolidation


T: Have S rewrite the sentences , remember
to keep the meaning unchanged


Ss: Try to do
T: Correct again
5. Homework


-Learn by heart the words, grammar


-Do exercises and prepare Unit 14: Listen
and read


5. pull


**** Language focus 4 (10’)
1/ Pre-teach


He said, “ I’m a plumber”
(quoted/ direct speech )


Model sentence : Reported speech
He said he was a plumber



1. Tenses


Direct speech Reported speech
Present simple


Will
Must


Past simple
Would
Had to


2. Pronouns( depending on the subject of the main
clause)


3. Adverbs of place and time


this-> that ; now-> then; here-> there
today-> that day


tomorrow-> the next day


yesterday-> the day before ; ago-> before
* Transformation drill


<i>Answer key</i>


b. He said he could fix the faucets
c. He said the pipes were broken



d. He said new pipes were very expensive
e. He said Mrs. Thu had to pay him then


a. The children said , “ We are waiting for the school
bus” -> The children said...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

<b>WEEK: 28</b> Date of preparation: 24 / 3 / 08


Period : 83 Date of teaching: 26 / 3/ 08


<b>Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>
Lesson 1: Getting started - Listen and Read
<b>I. Objectives: </b>


- Students will seek information about a language game to complete a summary
II. Language contents:


1 Vocabulary: none


2. Grammar:- question words before to infinitive
III. Techniques:- ordering, gap fill, matching.
IV. Teaching aids:- pictures, cassette, textbook
V. Procedures:


<b>Teacher and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up


- Have Ss look at the pictures on page 131 and do


the matching


Check if they know where/ in which country these
wonders are


<b>B. Presentation</b>
<b>1. Pre-reading</b>


- Set the scene “Nga, Nhi and Hoa and are playing
<i><b>a language game called guessing game. How does</b></i>
<i><b>this game work ?”</b></i>


Rearrange the statements in the right order of the
game


-Put the statements chart on the board


Ask Ss the read the statements and put them in the
right order in pairs


<b>C. Practice</b>
<b>2. While-reading</b>


-Call on some pairs to go to the board and write their
answers


Ss: read the dialogue while listening to the tape
Check if Ss’ guesses are right or not


Have Ss read the dialogue again and complete the


summary on page 132 in pairs


Then Ss compare their answers with their partners


<b>D. Consolidation</b>


Elicit the target language by asking Ss a question (in
Vietnamese)


Emphasize the form and use
3. Post-reading


<i><b>Matching</b></i>


_ correct and gives answer


<b>I. Getting started</b>
<i>Answer key:</i>
a. the Pyramid


b. Sydney Opera House
c. Stone Hedge


II. Listen and read
* Ordering


<i><b>How to play the guessing game</b></i>


1B: asks questions to find out who or what is
2A: thinks of a famous person or place



3B: wins of he/ she can guess the correct answer
4A: gives B a clue


5B: loses if he/ she can not guess the correct answer
6A: Can only answer “yes” or “no”


<i>Answer key: 2 4 1 6 3 5</i>
1) Gap-fill


<i>Answer key</i>


1. game 5. America


2. place 6. Golden


3. clue 7. right


4. Vietnam 8. was


2) Grammar
<i>Model sentences</i>
I don’t know to play it


<b>Form: S + V + Question word + to_Inf Ask Ss to do</b>
this exercise in pairs


<b> Use: Reduced form of an indirect question</b>
* Matching



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

4. Homework (5’)
- Learn model sentences
- Do exercises


- Prepare : next period Speak


A


1. suggest (v)
2. golden (adj)
3. clue (n)
4. bored (adj)
B


a/ a pieces of information that helps you discover the
answer to a question


b/ What you often fell when you have nothing to do
c/ make a gold


d/ make a suggestion
<i>Answer key</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

<b>WEEK: 28</b> Date of preparation: 25 / 3 / 08


Period : 84 Date of teaching: 27 / 3/ 08


<b>Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>
Lesson 2: Speak



I. Objectives : Ss will be able to make a report on famous places using reported speech
II. Language contents


1.Vocabulary :none


2.Grammar : Indirect Yes/ No question


III. Techniques: Matching , pair work, games.
IV. Teaching aids: pictures, sub- board
V. Procedures:


<b>Teacher ‘s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up (5’)


_ Ask Ss to write 10/15 famous world places
within 3 minutes ( in pairs )


<b>B. New lesson</b>
<b>1. Pre-speaking </b>


_ Put the chart with the statement on the board
Ask Ss to read the statements and the names of the
famous places in the box on page 133 and do the
matching


Ss: Try to do


2 .While- speaking



_ Check if Ss understand the statements and call
on some pairs to give their answers


Give feedback
<b>3. Post-speaking</b>


Ask Ss to write Yes/No questions about 10 places
in the box, using the information in the matching
(Work in groups )


Have Ss ask and answer the questions
Check Yes or No


Call on a group to demonstrate their work
T presents the model sentences


Yes/No questions -> direct speech


T guides Ss how to change into in directed
Yes/No question “Hue citadel was in the central


WHO IS THE FASTEST ?
<i>Answer keys</i>


The Pyramid , Stone Hence , Sydney Opera House
<b>1. </b><i><b> Pre—teach</b></i>


<i><b>Matching</b></i>


1. It was designed and built by the French civil engineer


with 300 meters in height


2. It is in South Central Asia, 8.848 meters high above
sea level


3.It was built from 246-> 209 BC and some people say it
can be seen from the moon


4.It is a bell striking the hours in the clock tower of the
Houses of Parliament in London


5.It is a skyscraper in Manhattan New York city


6.It is a famous place in Quang Binh province recognized
as a World Heritage site by Unessco


<b> 2 .Answer key</b>
1.Eiffel Tower
2.Mount Everest
3.Great Wall of China
4.Big Ben


5.Empire State building
6.Phong Nha Cave


<i>Questions and answer drill</i>
<i><b>Suggest</b></i>


<i><b>1. Have they just built the Eiffel Tower in Paris ?</b></i>



2/ Is the Empire State building located in New York
city ?


3/ Are the Petronas Twin Towers located in Malaysia ?
4. Is the Great barrier Reef in China ?


5. Have you ever seen Mount Rushmore ?
6. Is Mount Everest in Nepal ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

Vietnam “is “Indirect Yes/No question”
<b>C. Consolidation</b>


T and Ss form the structure
T emphasizes these notes


Choose a group’s answer to the model
Have Ss work in their group


Give feedback and correct
D. Homework


-Learn the model


_Do exercise 2 in workbook
-Prepare Lesson 3 Listen + focus 4


Model sentences


I said to Lan, “ Is Hue Citadel in the Central
Vietnamese ? “



-> I asked lan if/whether Hue Citadel was in the central
Vietnam


** Indirect Yes/ No question
<i>Form</i>


<i>Note: to say-> to ask /want to know</i>


Direct question Indirect question
Present simple


Past simple
Present perfect


Past simple
Past Perfect
Past perfect


S1: I said to Nam :”Is Petronas Twin Towers the tallest
building in the world ?”


S2: I asked Nam if/whether Petronas Twin Towers was
the tallest building in the world


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

<b>WEEK: 29</b> Date of preparation: 31 / 3/ 08


Period : 85 Date of teaching: 1 / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>


Lesson 3 Listen + focus 4


I. Objectives : SS will be able to recognize mistakes through listening to an advertisement
II. Language contents


a. Vocabulary: relaxing (a) crystal clear (a) coral (n) snorkel (v)
b. Grammar: V + to-inf , V-ing


III. Techniques : Crossword puzzle, What and Where
IV. Teaching aids :stereo, pictures, sub-board


V. Procedures


<i>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</i> <i>Contents</i>


A .Warm up


T puts the chart on the board


Ask Ss to listen and fill in the crossword
1. Unable to find something someone


2. Something that help you find out an answer to a
question


3. A very thick forest
4. To make a question
Ss practice in pairs / groups
T corrects and gives marks
B. New lesson



1. Pre- listening


_ Set situation and elicits words from Ss
Ss read , repeat after teacher


_Hold class to play “What and where “
2.While- listening


T sets the scene “You are going to listen to an
advertisement on the tape. There are 4 mistakes in
the advertisement in your books, What are they ? “
<b>Tape transcription</b>


<b>Mr. R: I think this place sounds all right.</b>


<b>Mrs. R: You mean the one in far north</b>
<b>Queensland?</b>


<b>Mr. R: Yes, it sounds perfect. The Coconut Palm</b>
<b>Hotel is right on the beach according to the</b>
<b>advertisement. Imagine getting up in the</b>
<b>morning and looking at the Pacific Ocean.</b>


<b>Mrs. R: It must be near a rainforest the hotel</b>
<b>offers guides tours. I hope there won’t be a lot of</b>
<b>mosquitoes.</b>


<b>Mr. R: I don’t think there will be because it’ll be</b>
<b>dry when we go.</b>



<b>Mrs. R: The Great Barrier Reef Marine Park is</b>
<b>a World Heritage Site, isn’t it ?</b>


<b>Mr. R: That’s right.</b>


<i>Crossword puzzle</i>


L O S E


C L U E


J U N G L E


G
E
S
T
Listen


* Pre-teach voc


Relaxing (a) relaxing vacation


Crystal clear (a) = completely (trong suoát) clear and
bright


Coral(n) ( picture)san hô


Snorkel(v) (translation)bơi lặn có sử dụng ống


thở


<i>What and where</i>


<i>Answer key</i>


snorkel relaxing
coral Heritage


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

<b>Mrs. R: Ok. Let’s find out how much it cots.</b>
<b>What’s the phone number?</b>


<b>Mr. R: 077-6924 3927</b>
<b>Mrs. R: 6924 3927 </b>
3. Post-listening


Have SS read the advertisement for a few minutes
Ask Ss some questions about the geographical
names in the paragraph


SS listen to the tape 2 or 3 times
Ss answer the questions


T corrects and gives marks
C. Consolidation


_ Elicits the target language from and present the
structures and the use


Ss: listen carefully and take notes then do exercise


language focus 4 in textbook on page 137


Call on some Ss to give their answers
- Correct if necessary


Ask Ss to write 6 sentences of their own , using
three forms above


D. Homework


-Do exercise , learn new words , structures
-Prepare next period.


Incorrect Correct


1.Southern


2.Coconut Palm Inn
3.jungle


4.6824


Far north


Coconut Palm Hotel
Rainforest


6924
** Language focus 4



1/Pre-teach


1.I want to go at weekends
to- inf


2.She enjoys swimming very much
V-ing


3.He can speak many languages
Modal verb bare inf


Concept check


1. Form : S+ V + To - inf


Use: Most of the verbs in English are followed by a to
infinitive


2. S+V+V-ing


Use follow ; enjoy , start, begin , advise,....
3.S + Modal verb + bare inf


Modal : can , could, will, would, shall, should ,may,
might , must,...


2/Practice
Answer key


1.to jog 4. to rain


2. go 5. to reach


3.to gather 6. to continue
7. get


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

<b>WEEK: 29</b> Date of preparation: 31 / 3 / 08


Period : 86 Date of teaching: 2 /4/ 08


<b>Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>
Lesson 4 Read


I. Objectives : SS will be able to get some knowledge about the wonders of the world
II. Language contents:


a. Grammar :none
b. Vocabulary :


compile(v) claim (v) honor(v) god (a) religion (n) royal (a)
III. Techniques : Hangman, Slap the board , Grid


IV. Teaching aids : sub- board, stereo, textbook
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<i><b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


A. Warm up


_ Draw dashes on the board, each dash is for a letter
of the word



Have Ss guess the letters one by one. For every
wrong guess draw a line (from 1 to 8) Ss will lose
the game if they guess wrong 8 times


B. New lesson.
1. Pre-reading


_ Present new words by simple English or
translation


Ss: listen, repeat new words and copy them


- Hold class to play “slap the board”


2. While-reading


_ write these sentences in a sub-board and put on
the board


-Ask Ss to decide if the statement are true or false
Ss: work in pairs


-Ask Ss to read the text on page 134, to check their
guesses


-Call on some Ss to correct the false statements
T corrects if necessary


<i><b> Hangman</b></i>



C O R A L


<sub></sub>


<i>Revision: Coral, crystal, clear, snorkel, relaxing</i>
I/ Pre-teach voc


To complete (v)


Claim (v) say something is true
Honor (v): to show respect
God (male)goddess (female)
Religion (n)


Royal (a)
<i><b>Slap the board</b></i>


II/ True_ False prediction


1) An Egyptian man compiled a list of what he thought
were the seven wonders of the world


2) The only surviving wonder is The Pyramid of
Cheops in Egypt


3) Today, we can still see the Hanging Gardens of
Babylon in present day Iraq



4) Angkor Wat was originally built to honor a Hindu
God


5) The Great Wall of China first wasn’t in the list of the
7 wonders of the world


6) In the early 15th<sub> century, The Khmer King chose</sub>
Angkor Wat as the new capital


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

3. Post-reading


Ask Ss to choose the best answers to complete the
sentences


Ss: try to do and present before class
T correct


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


Ss read the text again and complete this grid
Call on some Ss to give their answers
D. Homework


- Do exercises in workbook
- Prepare next period write


Answer key:


1) False: Greek man named Antipater did it
2) True



3) False. The only surviving wonder is the Pyramid of
Cheops in Egypt


4), 5): True


6) False: In the early 15th<sub> century, the Khmer King</sub>
chose Phnom Penh as the new capital


III/ Multiple choice
<i>Answer key</i>


a) C b) A c) D d)B
<i>Grid</i>



Wonders of the world Country
1. Hanging gardens of Babylon


2


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

<b>WEEK: 29</b> Date of preparation: 2 / 4 / 08


Period : 87 Date of teaching: 4 / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>
Lesson 5 Write


I. Objectives: Ss can write a letter to a friend about a place they visited
II. Language contents:



a. Grammar :none
b. Vocabulary:


ranger (a) edge (n) canyon (n) breathtaking (a) temperate (a) Stone Age (n)
III. Techniques: guessing game, Rub out and Remember, Interview


IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, sub-board
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up


- Ask Ss to think of one of the wonders of the
world and write it on a piece of paper


- Call on a student to the font of the class with
his/ her paper


Have the rest of the class ask him/ her Yes_
No questions to guess the wonder


Ss guessing correct is the winner
<b>B. New lesson</b>


<b>1. Pre_ teaching </b>


- Set situation and elicit words from Ss
Get Ss copy and read them



Ss: Listen , copy down and practice them in
chorus and individual.


2. While_ writing


- Check Ss understand and ask Ss to read the
letter Tim sent to Hoa about his trip to the
grand Canyon on page 135


- Tell Ss to complete the letter by inserting the
letters of the missing sentences (A, B, C, D)
- Call on some Ss to read their complete letters
in front of the class


T corrects


- Set the scene “ Imagine you have visited a
<i><b>place recently. Write a letter to a friend </b><b>of</b></i>
<i><b>yours and tell him/ her about this place ”</b></i>
- Draw the outline on the board and elicit some
details


3. Post_ writing


<i><b>Guessing game</b></i>
Ex:


S1: It isn’t in Asia
S2: Is it in Europe ?


S1: No, it isn’t
S3: Is it in America ?
S1: yes, it is


S4: Is it ...?
...


I. Pre_ teach voc


Ranger (a) (person who takes care of a park)
Edge (n)


Canyon (a)


Breathtaking (a): very exciting, impressive
Temperate (a)


Stone Age (n)


<i><b>Rub out and Remember</b></i>
II. Insertion


1. Letter on page 135/ textbook


<b>Answer key</b>


1 C 2 B 3 D 4 A


+ Place: Phong Nha Cave/ Cuc Phuong National
park.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

- Have Ss talk about something they have done
first by asking questions for them answer
- Ss write a letter in their notebooks
T corrects if necessary


<b>C. Consolidation</b>
- Guide ss to do


Ss use the outline on the board and the
information in their letters to make an
interview


D. Homework


- Write a completed letter in your notebook
- Do exercises in notebook


- Prepare focus 1,2,3


<i><b>Interview:</b></i>
<b>Ex: </b>


Where have you just visited ?
How far is it ?


How did you get there ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

<b>WEEK: 30</b> Date of preparation: 4 / 4 / 08



Period : 88 Date of teaching: / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>
Lesson 6: Focus 1, 2, 3


I. Objectives:


- At the end of the lesson Ss can report what people ask and answer about one of the world cultural
Heritage of Vietnam


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Vocabulary: construct (v), design (v), summit (v), expedition (n), guide (v)
2. Grammar: Passive in Past Simple tense


Indirect Yes_ No question
III. Techniques: Bingo, Matching


IV. Teaching aids: charts, posters, sub- board.
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<i><b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


1. Warm up


- Holds class to play “Bingo”


read: Temperate, breathtaking, royal, religious,
canyon, pyramid , god, jungle, compile



<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Presentation


_ Writes the words and their meaning on the board
Ask Ss to go the matching


_ Call on some Ss to draw the lines to connect the
words and correct then give answer keys


<b>2. Practice</b>


_ Ask Ss to retell the form of passive in the Past
Simple tense


_ Ask Ss to complete the sentences with the right
passive form of the verbs and


Call on some Ss to give their answers
+ Presentation


T sets the scene: Yesteday, Nga and Nhi talked
<i><b>about My Son, one of the world cultural Heritage</b></i>
<i><b>of Vietnam. Beside answering some of Nhi’s</b></i>
<i><b>questions Nga gave her some additional</b></i>
<i><b>information about My Son </b></i>


Ask Ss to retell the form of Indirect Yes_No
question


<b>+ Practice:</b>



* Bingo


<b>+ Language focus 1</b>
I. Matching


1. construct (v)
2. design (v)
3. summit (v)
4. expedition
5. guide


a. thiết kế


b. đồn thám hiểm
c. xây dựng


d. hướng dẫn viên
e. đỉnh (núi)
<i>Answer keys: 1C 2A 3E 4B 5D</i>
<i>Revision</i>


<b>Form of passive in Past Simple tense</b>
S + was / were + PP + by O


3. Practice (15’)
Answer keys


a. was completed d. was presented
b. was constructed e. was reached


c. was designed


+ Language focus 2


<b>Form: S + asked + if / whether...</b>
<i>Answer key:</i>


a. Nhi asked Nga if she knew My Son


b. Nhi asked Nga if My Son was in Quang Nam
province


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

_ Call on one student to read the question another
student read the reported sentence


_ Corrects if necessary


_ Ask Ss to retell the model
Ss: do exercises


T corrects if necessary


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


_ Remark all period and give ss some exercises
Ss: Try to do


D. Homework


- L. Focus 1: Turn the passive to active


- Do exercises in workbook


- Prepare next period: Consolidation for test


Son every year


f. Nhi asked Nga if Nga wanted to visit My Son one
day


* Language focus 3
4. Post (10’)


<i><b>Form:</b></i>


S + V + Question word + To_inf
<i>Answer key</i>


a. Nga told Nhi how to go there


b. Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets
c. Nga pointed out where to buy souvenirs


d. Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to Hoi An
e. Nga told Nhi what to do there during the visit
Exercises:


1. Nam asked lan “ Where do you live ?”
2. I asked Ly “ Are you tired?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>WEEK: 30</b> Date of preparation: / 4 / 08



Period : 89 Date of teaching: / 4/ 08


<b>TEST 45’</b>


<b>A. Aim: This period helps Ss to have a chance to review the knowledge having been learnt from unit 12 to </b>
unit 14 and Ss can recognize their errors and then they’ll correct them


<b>B. Contents: </b>


I Multiple choice : ( 3ms )


1, They told me where ………. tickets .
a, to get b, get c, got
2, My sister enjoys ……… a lot .


a, to cook b, cook c, cooking


3, Those books ………. at the bookshop by him yesterday .
a, were bought b, bought c, was bought


4, Are you interested ………. a harvest festival .
a, on b, in c, at
5, She asked me………a diving licence.


a. if I have b, if I had c, whether I have
6, I was reading ………… my sisters were playing with their dolls


a. when b, while c, at which
II Correct verbs in the brackets : ( 2ms )



1, We ( sit )……… in the garden when it ( start ) ………to rain .
2, The light ( go )………… out while I and Nam ( write ) ……….. an assay .
3, I’m afraid you must ( turn )………right here .


4, Huyen always (go)………….. to class very late .


III Rewrite the sentences into Reported Speech <b> : ( 2 ms )</b>
1, She said to me “ Do you watch the film ? ”


She asked……….….
2, Alice said “ I don’t like chocolates ”


Alice said………..
3, He said to Lan “ Are you ready ? ”


He asked………
4, Nam said “ I can play the piano .”


Frank said………..
IV Change the sentences into Passive Form : ( 1.5m )


1, They speak English all over the world .


………
2, Her mother will take her to hospital next week .


………..
3. My mother took me to the zoo last Sunday.



………..
V Complete the passage with the verbs in the box . ( 1.5ms )


win decorate put send make taste
1. How do they decide who……….. in the contest?


2. In the contest, the team members ……….. the rice.
3. I’ll go to the tailor and ……… my new clothes.
4. My father and I usually ……….the Christmas trees.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

<b>WEEK: 30</b> Date of preparation: 9 / 4 / 08


Period : 90 Date of teaching: 11 / 4/ 08


<b>CORRECT TEST</b>


A. Aims : At the end of the lesson ss can understand their mistakes.
I. ( 3ms)


1a ; 2c ; 3a ; 4b ; 5b ; 6b
II. (2ms)


1. were sitting – stared
2. were writing - went
3. turn


4. goes
5.
III ( 2ms )



1. She asked me if I watched the film
2. Alice said she didn’t like chocolates
3. He asked Lan if she was ready.
4. He said he could play the piano.
5.


IV. (1.5 ms)


1. English is spoken all over the world


2. She will be taken to hospital by her mother next week
3. I was taken to the zoo by my mother last Sunday
V. (1.5 ms)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

<b>WEEK: 31</b> Date of preparation: / 4 / 08


Period : 91 Date of teaching: / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 15: COMPUTERS</b>


Lesson 1: Getting started _ Listen & read + Focus 3


I. Objectives: Ss will be able to express their opinions about a problem and get Ss to differentiate facts from
opinions through reading


II. Language contents:


1. Vocabulary: Printer connect plug


manual under guarantee socket



2. Grammar: Present Perfect tense


III. Techniques: Bingo, T/ F prediction, write it up


IV. <b> Teaching aids : photocopied picture, realia, cassette, chart</b>
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<i><b>Teacher and students’ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


A. Warm up


Ss: write the topic on the board


-Ask Ss to think of the topic and express their
opinions


- Collect Ss’ opinions


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Presentation


- Set situation and elicit words from Ss
Get Ss copy and read them


Ss: Listen , copy down and practice them in
chorus and individual.


_ Check vocabulary



_ Teacher sets the scene: “ Mr Nhat are talking
<i><b>about the problem of the computer they’ve just</b></i>
<i><b>bought. What happens to the computer ?”</b></i>


_ Put the chart on the board and have Ss guess
which statements are true and which are false


2. Practice


T writes Ss’ guesses on the board.


Ask Ss to open their books, read the dialogue and
listen to the tape


Have Ss work in pairs again to check if their
guesses are right or not


Give feedback and correct


<b>I. Getting stared</b>
<i>Brainstorm</i>


Computers can help us
- save time


- ...


<b>-Suggestions:</b>



 Computers help us learn interestingly
 Computers help us learn more quickly


 Computers are convenient/ easy for keeping/


storing information


 Computers are very quickly in giving answers to


our questions
<b>II. Listen and read</b>
I. Pre _teach vocabulary
Printer (n) (picture)
Manual (a) ( action)
Connect (v) (translation)
Under guarantee (n) (translation)
Plug (n) (picture)
Socket (n) (Realia)
<i><b>* Bingo</b></i>


. True/ False prediction
1. The printer isn’t working.


2. Nam has already turned the computer on


3. Nam knows how to connect a printer but he hasn’t
connected it properly.


4. The manual helped them to find out the problem.
5. Mr Nhat bought the computer in HCM city and it’s


still under guarantee.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

<b>3. Further practice</b>


_ Remind the using “ Facts or Opinion”


<i><b>+ Fact: a thing that is known to be true,</b></i>
<i><b>especially when it can be proved</b></i>


<i><b>+ Opinion: your feelings or thoughts about</b></i>
<i><b>someone or something, rather than a fact</b></i>


Ss: Listen and read the statements then check
_ Control and correct mistakes


C. Consolidation


- Explain and ask ss to look at the table on page
146, read the sentences and check


Ss give their answers
T corrects


Aks Ss to use reported speech to rewrite the
dialogue


Ss work in 3 groups


They write their report on a poster and put it on
the board for public check. .



D. Homework
- learn new words


- Do exercises in workbook


1. T
2. T


3. F...and he has connected it properly
4. F


5. T


6. F Mr Nhat thinks the company should do
something with it


<b>Answer key</b>
a) Fact
b) Opinion
c) Fact
d) Opinion
e) Fact
f) Opinion


*** Language focus 3
<i>Present Perfect tense</i>


<i>Use: finished actions  indefinite time incompleted</i>
actions  for, since, recently



<i>Form: have/ has + past participle</i>
Write it up


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

<b>WEEK: 31</b> Date of preparation: / 4 / 08


Period : 92 Date of teaching: / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 15: COMPUTERS</b>
Lesson 2 Speak + Listen


I. Objectives: Ss will be able to use some common useful expressions to express agreement and
disagreement


II. Language contents:


1. Vocabulary: challenging (a), time_ consuming, adjust (v)
knob (n), disagree, agree (v)


2. Grammar: Review “ Do you think that ………..?”
III. Techniques: guessing game, brainstorm, Mapped dialogue
IV. Teaching aids: photocopied pictures, charts, cassette
V. Procedure


<i><b>Teacher and students’ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


A. Warm up


_ Ask Ss each to think of one of the ways
computers are helpful and write it on a


piece of paper


- Call on a student to the front of the class
And get the rest of the class ask him/ her “
Do you think that computers are...?”
Ss can only answer with “Yes or No”
<b>B. New lesson. </b>


1. Pre_ speaking


- Write the topic on the board


Useful expressions to express agreement
and disagreement


Explain “on the other hand”


Put the table on the board and elicit Ss’
answer then write them in the table


Put the photocopied pictures on the right of
the board and the cues on the left


2. While_ speaking


- First set situation and elicit words from Ss
- Then have Ss copy and read them


Ss: Listen , copy down and practice them in
chorus and individual.



_ Check vocabulary


Get a student to demonstrate the model (a)
Ask Ss to use the adjectives in the box on
page 140 to express their opinions
<b>3. Post-speaking</b>


Ss work in pairs


- Control and correct mistakes.
<b>* Pre-listening</b>


T gets Ss to understand how events are


<i><b>Guessing game</b></i>


“ Do you think that ...?”


*Brainstorm:
<i>Matching</i>


1. Reading comic books d


2. Playing in the rain a


3. Oriving a car b


4. Foreign food c



<i>Answer key: 1b 2c 3a 4d </i>
T: I think driving a car is easy.


P: I disagree. I think it’s difficult to drive a car.
SPEAK


<i>New words</i>
Challenging (a)
Time_ consuming
Adjust (v)


Knob (n)


<i>Mapped dialogue</i>


I am having problems with What’s wrong ?
It doesn’t work. I... No, you didn’t
Oh, sorry


<i><b>Listen</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

sequenced in a flow chart and the meaning
of all the shapes used in the chart


<b>* While-listening</b>


T plays the tape 2 or 3 times and asks Ss to
listen


Tell Ss to fill the gaps with the information


they have heard from the tape


Ss compare answers with their partners
Ss write on the board


<b>* Post-listening</b>


_ Have some pairs of ss ask and answer
Ss: Try to do


- Listen and correct answer then give the
key ( sub-board)


<b>C. Consolidation</b>
- Remark all period
D. Homework


- Do exercises in workbook
- prepare Lesson 3


(circle)
  questions
(triangle)
 answers
(oval)


a. Do you have the correct change ?
b. Yes


c. What do you want to drink ?


d. Take it


<b>#. Tape transcript</b>


<b>Computer programmers use flow chart to help</b>
<b>people understand how events are sequenced.</b>
<b>All the shapes on this chart have a particular</b>
<b>meaning. For example, the circles indicate a</b>
<b>starting or stopping point, the strangles are</b>
<b>questions and the ovals are answers</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

<b>WEEK: 31</b> Date of preparation: / 4 / 08


Period : 93 Date of teaching: / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 15: COMPUTERS</b>
Lesson 3 Read
I. Objectives:


At the end of lesson Ss can know more about how computers work in a university
II. Language contents:


1. Vocabulary: freshman (n) bulletin board (n) impact (n)


jack(n) skeptical (a)


2. Grammar: /


III. Techniques: jumbled words, open prediction
IV. Teaching aids: chart, cardboards



<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<i><b>Teacher and students’ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


A. Warm up


Put the cardboards on the board
Ss work in 2 teams


- Correct and give the key and remark.


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre- reading


- Set situation and give out some new words
and practice them.


Ss repeat and say the meaning and then
practice in chorus and individual


* Check vocabulary.


_ Ask Ss to guess what they’ve going to
read


- writes Ss’ guesses on the board
2. While_ reading


- Have ss read the text clearly before class


Ss: Read aloud


Get Ss to read the text again then choose
true or false


3. Post- reading


- Ask Ss to answer questions
Ss : try to write on the board


_ Correct and give key answer (sub-board)


*** Jumbled words: words relating to a computer
1. terpirn


2. seumo
3. recsnc
4. nimorot


5. bdoaryke
6. moseu dap
<i>Answer key</i>


1. Printer
2. mouse


3. screen
4. monitor


5. key board


6. mouse pad
READ


* Pre-teach


freshman (n) (explanation)
jack (a) ( Translation)
bulletin board = notice board
skeptical (a) ( Translation )
impact (n) ( Translation)
<i>What and Where</i>


* Open prediction


1. Where in the library do we get/ find information
?


2. How can we store the information ?


3. If we want to discuss something, how can we do
?
<b>Keys</b>
a) T
b) T
c) T
d) F
e) F
f) T


a) It has no library. All the information normally


found in a library is now stored in the university’s
computes


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

<b>C. Consolidation</b>


- Remark all period and ask ss some
questions


Ss: Listen and try to answer
- Correct again


D. Homework
- Learn words


- Prepare for next period


or messages normally found on a bulletin board
c) A computer and a telephone


d) With a bulletin board on the Internet, a great
number of people can get access to bulletin and
exchange information quickly


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

<b>WEEK: 32</b> Date of preparation: 20 / 4 / 08


Period : 94 Date of teaching: 22 / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 15: COMPUTERS</b>


Lesson 4: Write + language focus 4


I. Objectives:


At the end of lesson Ss can be able to write a set of instructions on how to use the printer and complete a
flow chart


II. Language contents:


1. Vocabulary: paper input tray, power button, icon, output path, remove.
2. Grammar: present perfect


III. Techniques: matching, gap fill, writing
IV. Teaching aids: chart, pictures, sub-board
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up :


Teacher holds class to play Bingo


<b>B. New lesson</b>
1. Pre_ writing


T uses the picture on page 142 to elicit words from
Ss


Ss repeat and say the meaning
Have Ss copy


Ask Ss to look at exercise 1 and do the matching


Get some Ss to give their answers and correct
2. While_ writing


Ask Ss to look at the pictures on page 143 and read
the cues


Have Ss work in pairs to outline the instructions
Call on some Ss to say out the instructions first (1
or 2 Ss for each sentence)


3. Post –writing


- Give feedback and correct and ask Ss to write the
instructions in their notebooks


<b>C. Consolidation</b>


- Remark all period and let Ss complete the
dialogues


Ss: work in pairs


Have some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues for
the class


Bingo


Monitor Power Computer


Tray Printer Freshman



Notice board Bulletin board Paper
<b>Write</b>


* Pre_ teach vocabulary
Paper input tray (n) : ( picture)
Power button (n) : ( picture)
Icon (n): ( picture)


Output path (n): ( picture)
Remove (v): (translation)
<i><b>Matching</b></i>


<i>Answer key</i>


a)3 b)1 c)6 d)2 e)4 f)5
<i>Answer key</i>


Remove the old paper and load the new paper in
the paper input tray


Wait for the power button to flash


Have the pages appear on the computer screen
Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a
few seconds


The printed paper will come out of the output
path in a minute



<i><b>Focus 4</b></i>
<i>Answer key</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

D. Homework


- Do exercises in workbook


- Prepare: Language focus 1, 2ronunciation
correction


3) have been
4) have heard
5) happened
6) had
7) fell
8) broke
9) has arrived


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

<b>WEEK: 32</b> Date of preparation: 20 / 4 / 08


Period : 95 Date of teaching: 23 / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 15: COMPUTERS</b>
Lesson 5: Language focus
I. Objectives:


At the end of lesson Ss can be able to know and use “yet” and “already” to express the present perfect .
II. Language contents:


<b>* Vocabulary:</b>



<b>* Grammar: Present Perfect “ yet and already”</b>
1.


III. Techniques: matching, gap fill, writing


IV. Teaching aids: lucky number, gap _fill dialogue, sub-board
<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


1. Warm up


_ Divide the class into 2 teams and
guide ss to play.


Ss: Listen and lay


<b>B. New lesson</b>
<b>1. Presentation</b>


- Sets the scene and show the chart
(Ba’s diary) on the board


Ss: listen carefully


- present the present perfect with “yet”
and “already”


Have Ss copy


2. Practice


Ss complete the dialogue using Yet and
already


Call on some pairs to demonstrate the
dialogue for the class


Give feedback and correct


-Ask Ss to look at the flight information


<i>Lucky number</i>


1/ What does your father / mother do ?
2/ What did you do last night ?


3/ Lucky number


4/ How often is Hue festival held ?
(It is held every 2 years )


5/ Lucky number


6/ What were you doing at 8 o’clock
last night ?


7/ Guess what your parents are doing at the moment ?
8/ Who often cooks in your family ?



9/ Which grade will you be in next school year ?
10/ Lucky number


1. Pre_ teach
<i>*Language focus 1</i>


_ Do homework √  (already)
_ Tidy the room X  (not yet)


_ Turn off the washing machine √  (already)
_ Call and tell aunt Le to have lunch √  (already)
<b>Present perfect with “Yet” and “Already”</b>
<i>Use:</i>


Yet: used in questions and negative statements.
Already: used in positive statements


<b>Position:</b>


Yet: at the end of the sentence


Already: between auxiliary have and past participle
2. Practice


<b>Answer key</b>


- I have finished it already


- I haven’t cleaned and tidied it yet
- I have already turned it off



- I’ve already called and told her to have lunch with us
** Focus 2


<b>Questions and answers</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

tables and asks questions to show the
models


Ask Ss talking in turns to ask and
answer the questions


Ss: Listen and practice in pairs
- Control and correct mistakes
<b>C. Consolidation</b>


_ Remark all period and give some
exercises.


Ss: Look and try to do.
- Correct again


D. Homework


- Do exercises in workbooks
- Prepare: Correction 4
- Write questions & answers


S: Yes, it has already departed



T: Has the flight from Los Angeles arrived yet ?
S: No, it hasn’t arrived yet


Exercises: Correct verbs in the bracket.
1. We ( live)………. for 5 years


2……….. Nam (do)………..his homework yet?
3. They (already ,visit)………. HCM city.
4. I ( just come )………. here.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

<b>WEEK: 32</b> Date of preparation:24 / 4 / 08


Period : 96 Date of teaching: 26 / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 16: INVENTIONS</b>


<b> Lesson 1 Getting started - Listen and read</b>


I. Objectives: Ss can know the origin of paper and talk about the process of producing something
II. Language contents:


1.Vocabulary: remove (v) process (a),crush (v) ,mold (n), liquefy (v), conveyor belt, grind (v)
manufacture (v)


2. Grammar: none


III. Techniques: quiz, matching, open_ Prediction , grid
IV. Teaching aids: Cassette, Pictures, grid chart , sub-board
<b>V. Procedures:</b>



<b>Teacher and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up


T tells the teams to raise their hands when T
finished the questions


<b>B. New lesson</b>


- Get Ss to look at the pictures on page 147
and ask them some questions to evaluate how
much they understand the pictures


-Ask Ss to read the sentence (AE) and match
them with the correct pictures


- Call on some Ss to give their answers
Ss: Listen and do as directed


Give feedback and correct
1. Presentation


- Set situation and give out some new words
and practice them.


Ss repeat and say the meaning and then
practice in chorus and individual


* Check vocabulary.
2. Practice



- set the scene: Tim Jones, Hoa’s American
<i><b>pen pal, is visiting a chocolate factory with</b></i>
<i><b>his class and his teacher. Mrs, Allen, now,</b></i>
<i><b>guess who will show them around the</b></i>
<i><b>factory and what they will learn from this</b></i>
<i><b>visit</b></i>


Ss guess


_ write Ss’ prediction on the board and play
the tape and asks Ss to listen while reading
then dialogue on page 148


- Ask Ss to match the half sentences on page
149 and let Ss compare their answer with
their pictures


** Quiz _ who did it ?


Who was the inventor of ...? or who invented ...?


<b>I. Getting started</b>


Where are they form ? (picture a, b, c)
What is the man in picture a) doing ?
What is it ? (d)


<i>Answer key:</i>
A. b)



B. c)
C. e)
D. a)
E. d)


<b>II. Listen and read</b>
1 Pre_ teach vocabulary
Remove (v)


Liquefy (v)
Crush (v)


Grind / ground / ground
Manufacture (v)= produce
Process (n)


Mold (n)
Conveyor belt
* Open prediction
2. Practice
<i>Answer key</i>
E a)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

3. Further practice


- Put the gird on the board and have Ss :
Look and copy


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and fill in


the grid


<b>C, Consolidation </b>


Remark and call some pairs of ss to go to the
board to write their answers


Give feedback and correct
D. Homework


- Learn by heart new words


- Rewrite the grid using sequence markers
(first, next, then,..., finally)


- Prepare: Speak


A f)
<i>Grid</i>


<i>Answer key</i>


1. The beans are washed, weighed and cooked
2. The shells are removed


3. The beans are crushed and liquefied


4. Cocoa butter, sugar, vanilla and milk are added
5. The mixture is ground, rolled and poured into
the molds



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

<b>WEEK: 32</b> Date of preparation: / 4 / 08


Period : 97 Date of teaching: / 4/ 08


<b>Unit 16: INVENTIONS</b>
Lesson 2 Speak & Listen


I. Objectives:


- At the end of the lesson Ss can talk about the inventions using the passive and fill in the gaps and order
sentences from listening. They can know more information about papermaking


II. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary:


Facsimile , X_ ray, Reinforced concrete , Loudspeaker, Microphone, Helicopter procedure microware ,
pulp , vacuum, vat , drain , roller , roll.


2. Grammar: none


III. Techniques: Bingo, Word_ cue drill, Making reports
IV. Teaching aids: Tables


<b>V. Procedures:</b>


<i><b>Teacher and students’ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


A. Warm up



Get Ss to brainstorm a list of 10 words and
write them on the board


Ask Ss to choose any 4 words and copy them
into their paper call out the words until
someone has licked all of his/ her words and
shouts “Bingo”


<b>B. New lesson</b>
<b>* Activity 1</b>
1.Pre_speaking


- Have Ss study the meanings of the inventions
using Vietnamese


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue on page 148
again and pick out all of the passive sentences
-Call on Ss to give their answer


Have Ss review the passive in the present and
past simple tenses


2. While_ speaking


T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about
the inventions to the fill in the missing
information


Ask Ss to look at the tables on page 150 and
page 156 and model the exchanges, using a


good student


3. Post -speaking
Ss work in pairs


Ss ask and answer then fill in the missing
information


Monitor and help Ss if necessary.
Ss practice before class


Have Ss copy the complete table
Model and have Ss repeat


Ask Ss to use the complete table to report what


** Bingo (Revision)


(foreman, process, manufacture, remove, crush,
liquefy, grind, pour, mold, conveyor belt)


<b>Speak</b>


I. Pre_ teach voc
1. Facsimile


2. Reinforced concrete
3. Microphone


4. X_ ray


5. Loudspeaker
6. Helicopter


II. Grammar Awareness
<i>Answer key</i>


1) This is where the cocoa beans are stored ( pre,
simple)


2) That button can not be touched (passive with
model)


3) The beans are washed, weighed and cooked here
4) After the shells are removed...into molds
T: What was invented by Friedrich Koneig ?
S: Printing Press


T: When was it invented ?
S: In 1810


T: Where was Koenig form ?
S: He was from Germany


*** Making reports


<i><b>Eg: The printing press was invented by Friedrich</b></i>
Koenig in 1810


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

they have found
* Activity 2


<b>1. Pre-listening</b>


Ask Ss each think of an invention or write it
down on piece of paper


Call on 1 student to the front of the class or ask
the rest of the Ss. Ask him / her Yes / No
question


The chosen student can only answer Yes or No
Elicit words from Ss


Ss repeat and say the meaning
2 . While_ listening


Inform the topic: paper_ making process
Have Ss read the sentences


Play the tape 2 or 3 times and ask Ss to fill in
the gaps with the words the catch


Call on Ss to give their answers
3. Post_ listening


Ask Ss to read the sentences (a_ g) carefully
and guess the order


Play the tape again and ask
Ss to listen



Give feedback and correct
<b>C. Consolidation</b>


- Remark all period
D. Homework


- Use the information in the table to write 12
complete sentences in the...


- Prepare : Lesson 4 read


<b>Pre_ teach vocabulary</b>
Procedure (n) (trans)
Pulp (n) : making question
(What is used to make paper ?)
vat (n)


drain (v)
roller (n)
roll (n)


<b>What and Where</b>


<i>Answer key</i>


1. simple 3. two hundred
2. same 4. left 5. rollers
<i>Answer key:</i>


c; d ; a ; e ; g


Tape transcript:


Papermaking is a simple process. The
<b>procedure is almost the same as it was 200 years</b>
<b>ago. Look closely at this picture of n old</b>
<b>papermaking machine. On the left is the pulp vat.</b>
<b>Paper pulp was placed in the vat and mix with a</b>
<b>lot of water and onto a conveyor belt. The</b>
<b>conveyor belt took them under the rollers</b>
<b>smoothed the fibers and pressed them dry. The</b>
<b>finished paper was then put on the roll at the end.</b>
<b>You can see the roll of paper at the far right of he</b>
<b>picture.</b>


Procedure Pulp vat


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179></div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×